WO2019196801A1 - Data transmission method, and communication apparatus and system - Google Patents

Data transmission method, and communication apparatus and system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019196801A1
WO2019196801A1 PCT/CN2019/081769 CN2019081769W WO2019196801A1 WO 2019196801 A1 WO2019196801 A1 WO 2019196801A1 CN 2019081769 W CN2019081769 W CN 2019081769W WO 2019196801 A1 WO2019196801 A1 WO 2019196801A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
resource unit
terminal device
network device
precoding
size
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/081769
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
徐明慧
张希
陈磊
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2019196801A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019196801A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0456Selection of precoding matrices or codebooks, e.g. using matrices antenna weighting
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
    • H04L25/03Shaping networks in transmitter or receiver, e.g. adaptive shaping networks
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L25/00Baseband systems
    • H04L25/02Details ; arrangements for supplying electrical power along data transmission lines
    • H04L25/03Shaping networks in transmitter or receiver, e.g. adaptive shaping networks
    • H04L25/03891Spatial equalizers
    • H04L25/03898Spatial equalizers codebook-based design
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001Arrangements for dividing the transmission path

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method, a communication device, and a system for data transmission.
  • MIMO multiple input multiple output
  • the precoding technology is a very important step of MIMO.
  • the system Before performing precoding, the system first maps the data information to be sent to different layers through layer mapping, so that the data information is allocated to different ones in a certain way.
  • the data information assigned to the layer is mapped to the physical antenna by precoding techniques.
  • the precoding technique can transfer some necessary signal processing procedures that are difficult to implement at the receiving end to the transmitting end to ensure the signal performance of the transmission process.
  • the existing precoding technology is actually an adaptive technology. As channel state information (CSI) changes, the result of precoding the data information will change accordingly. This change according to CSI
  • CSI channel state information
  • the real-time changing data information pre-processing technology enables the terminal device to obtain the correct target data information in the changed CSI. Therefore, pre-coding is a very critical technology in the long term evolution (LTE) system MIMO.
  • Typical precoding methods can be divided into linear precoding and nonlinear precoding. Each type of precoding has its suitable working scenario.
  • the terminal device determines the full-bandwidth precoding mode of the terminal device according to the channel correlation of the full bandwidth.
  • the system bandwidth since the system bandwidth is small, the channel correlation between the terminal devices is at the full bandwidth. The change in the above is small, and the pre-coding method between each terminal device can be accurately determined by using the full-bandwidth channel correlation.
  • the system bandwidth can be as high as 400M, and the maximum bandwidth supported by each terminal device will be greatly different. At this time, the channel correlation between terminal devices is difficult in the system. The bandwidth is consistent. Therefore, the pre-coding mode of the terminal device is determined by the channel correlation of the full bandwidth at this time, which may result in inaccurate selection of the precoding mode and affect system performance.
  • the present application provides a data transmission method, communication device and system, which can improve system performance.
  • a method for data transmission comprising: determining, by a network device, a plurality of channel correlation values of a plurality of terminal devices on a first resource unit, wherein the plurality of terminal devices comprise using the first resource a unit communication device, each channel correlation value of the plurality of channel correlation values indicating a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices; the network device according to the plurality of channel correlation values, Determining a precoding mode corresponding to each of the plurality of terminal devices, where the first terminal device corresponds to a first precoding mode, and the first terminal device is any one of the plurality of terminal devices; the network device Transmitting data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit in a first precoding manner corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the network device uses the resource unit as the granularity to determine the precoding mode according to the channel correlation value of the terminal device on the resource unit, and the precoding method corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, which avoids the present In the prior art, the terminal device determines the disadvantage of a precoding method over the full bandwidth. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit by using the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
  • the plurality of terminal devices include devices that communicate using the first resource unit, each channel correlation value of the plurality of channel correlation values indicating interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices degree.
  • each channel correlation value represents the degree of interference between each two terminal devices, and when there are n plurality of terminal devices communicating using the first resource unit, then the plurality of channels corresponding to the n terminal devices Correlation values include One.
  • the multiple correspondence value may include (ie, 3) channel correlation values, that is, channel correlation values corresponding to the first terminal device and the second terminal device, correlation values corresponding to the first terminal device and the third terminal device, and the second value The channel correlation value corresponding to the third terminal device of the terminal device.
  • the value of the channel correlation indicates the degree of interference between two terminal devices that communicate using the first resource granularity.
  • the degree of interference between the two terminal devices is greater, and vice versa.
  • the smaller the channel correlation value the smaller the degree of interference between the two terminal devices.
  • the size of the first resource unit is preset, that is, the size of the first resource unit is a system default.
  • the network device and the terminal device do not need to determine the size of the first resource unit, and the network device and the terminal device know the size of the first resource unit in advance.
  • the network device may directly determine the precoding mode by using the method in the embodiment of the present application according to the default first resource unit size.
  • the terminal device can directly demodulate the received data by using the method of the embodiment of the present application according to the default first resource unit size.
  • the network device and the terminal device do not need to confirm the size of the resource unit in the embodiment of the present application, and the network device does not need to send signaling to the terminal device to indicate the size of the resource unit. Applying an embodiment can save resources and reduce signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device determines a size of the first resource unit
  • the network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the size of the first resource unit.
  • the size of the first resource unit is determined by the network device.
  • the network device first determines the size of the first resource unit, and then needs to indicate the size of the resource unit of the terminal device.
  • the first indication information may be high layer signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling, or may be medium access control (MAC) layer signaling.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC medium access control
  • the embodiment may not be limited to the downlink control information (DCI), or the broadcast information.
  • the determining, by the network device, the size of the first resource unit includes:
  • the network device determines the size of the first resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of the channel correlation of each two terminal devices over the full bandwidth.
  • the slower the channel correlation change of the two terminal devices on the full bandwidth the larger the resource unit
  • the faster the channel correlation of the two terminal devices on the full bandwidth changes the smaller the resource unit.
  • the size of the resource unit is directly related to the performance of the non-linear pre-coding.
  • the embodiment of the present application determines the size of the resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of the channel correlation of the terminal device on the full bandwidth by using the most intuitive method. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the size of the resource unit.
  • the size of the appropriate resource unit can be determined flexibly according to the channel state.
  • the network device determines the size of the first resource unit, including:
  • the network device determines the size of the first resource unit according to the size of the scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices.
  • the larger the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device the larger the absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit or the larger the number of RBs included, the smaller the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and the absolute bandwidth occupied by the resource unit (in MHz). ) or the smaller the number of RBs included.
  • the network device determines the size of the first resource unit, including:
  • the network device may determine a resource unit size corresponding to the current subcarrier according to a one-to-one correspondence between the preset multiple subcarrier spacings and the multiple resource unit sizes.
  • the network device can flexibly determine the size of the appropriate resource unit according to the size of the subcarrier spacing.
  • the network device determines the size of the first resource unit, including:
  • the network device selects one of the preset values of the plurality of resource unit sizes as the size of the first resource unit.
  • the size of the resource unit is directly selected from the set, which can reduce the complexity of the implementation and reduce the signaling overhead.
  • the network device selects one of the values of the plurality of resource unit sizes as the size of the first resource unit, including:
  • the network device is preset from at least one of a degree of fluctuation of channel correlation between the terminal devices, a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the plurality of terminal devices, and a size of a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the plurality of terminal devices.
  • One of the multiple resource unit size values is selected as the size of the first resource unit.
  • the network device needs to resend the first indication information to indicate the latest resource unit size, and determine the precoding manner according to the updated resource unit size.
  • the network device may not need to send the first indication information, and the terminal device may follow the indication of the network device during the last data transmission. Determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current data transmission.
  • the network device may also send the first indication information to indicate the size of the resource unit, regardless of whether the size of the resource unit changes.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the size of the resource unit may be periodically updated in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto, 40 ms, 80 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 400 ms, 800 ms, 1600 ms, ... and the like.
  • the embodiment of the present application can periodically determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current channel state by periodically updating the resource unit size, and further determine the precoding mode according to the size of the updated resource unit, thereby improving system performance.
  • the embodiment of the present application may also update the size of the resource unit aperiodically.
  • the size update of a resource unit is triggered by a network device or a terminal device.
  • the network device or the terminal device updates the channel state information to update the resource unit size flexibly, and when the channel state changes greatly, the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current channel state can be determined in time, and then The precoding method is determined according to the size of the updated resource unit, which can improve system performance.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device determines a size of the first resource unit according to a preset parameter, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
  • the network device and the terminal device determine the size of the first resource unit in the same manner or rule.
  • the same resource unit size can be determined by the same method or rule at both ends of the transceiver. Therefore, the network device does not need to send an indication of the size of the additional resource unit to the terminal device.
  • the network device and the terminal device determine the size of the resource unit according to the same rule. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the size of the resource unit of the terminal device by using signaling, which can reduce the complexity of the implementation and reduce the number of the information. Make the cost.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
  • the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information and the resource unit in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device The numbers are equal, wherein each bit in the second indication information is used to indicate a precoding manner corresponding to one resource unit.
  • the precoding mode of each resource unit may be explicitly indicated in the form of a bitmap. If the number of resource units is four, the bitmap has four bits, for example, 0110 indicates four.
  • the precoding method on the resource unit is ⁇ linear precoding, nonlinear precoding, nonlinear precoding, linear precoding ⁇ , or ⁇ nonlinear precoding, linear precoding, linear precoding, nonlinear precoding ⁇ .
  • the embodiment of the present application indicates the precoding mode in an explicit manner. Therefore, the terminal device can directly determine the precoding mode corresponding to each resource unit according to the second indication information, and does not need an additional calculation process, thereby reducing implementation complexity.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends, by using the first resource unit, a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence, where a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate that the first terminal device uses the first resource unit to communicate The precoding mode, and/or the power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends a PTRS sequence by using a plurality of symbols in the first resource unit, where the plurality of symbols includes a first symbol set and a second symbol set, a phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set and the second a phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the set of symbols is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit; and/or, the network device sends the first terminal device to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit The power adjustment method when sending data.
  • the embodiment of the present application implicitly indicates the precoding mode and/or the power adjustment mode by referring to the phase difference of the signal sequence. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the precoding mode and/or the power adjustment mode by signaling, thereby saving the letter. Make the cost.
  • the precoding mode when the first terminal device uses the first resource unit to communicate is a non-linear precoding mode, where the method further includes:
  • the network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the third indication information and the resource unit in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device The numbers are equal, wherein each bit in the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment manner corresponding to one resource unit.
  • the power adjustment mode of each resource unit may be indicated in the form of a bitmap. For example, if the number of resource units is 4 and four resource units, the bitmap has 4 bits, such as four.
  • 0110 indicates that the precoding methods on the four resource units are ⁇ modulo, power back, power back, modulo ⁇ , or ⁇ power back, modulo, modulo , power back ⁇ ; if the precoding mode of the terminal equipment on some of the resource units is linear precoding, the power adjustment mode indicated by the bitmap is invalid.
  • the power adjustment mode is indicated in an explicit manner. Therefore, the terminal device can directly determine the power adjustment mode corresponding to each resource unit according to the second indication information, and the implementation complexity can be reduced without an additional calculation process.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends a fourth indication information to the first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the first terminal device, where the MCS is used to indicate that the network device passes the first resource.
  • the power adjustment mode when the unit transmits data to the first terminal device.
  • the MCS implicitly indicates the power adjustment mode. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the power adjustment mode by signaling, which can save signaling overhead.
  • a method for data transmission includes: receiving, by a terminal device, data sent by a network device by using the first resource unit; the terminal device demodulating the data by using a first precoding manner corresponding to the terminal device
  • the first precoding mode is determined by the network device according to a plurality of channel correlation values of the plurality of terminal devices on the first resource unit, where the plurality of terminal devices include devices that use the first resource unit to communicate,
  • Each of the plurality of channel correlation values represents a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices.
  • the network device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity.
  • the precoding method corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the terminal device in the prior art is determined to determine a full bandwidth.
  • the method on the terminal device side described in the second aspect corresponds to the method for describing the network device in the first aspect, and the method on the terminal device side may refer to the description on the network device side to avoid repetition, and the detailed description is omitted here as appropriate.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the size of the first resource unit.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device determines a size of the first resource unit according to a preset parameter, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device receives the second indication information sent by the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
  • the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device. And wherein each bit in the second indication information is used to indicate a precoding manner corresponding to one resource unit.
  • the method further includes:
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device receives a PTRS sequence that is sent by the network device by using multiple symbols in the first resource unit, where the multiple symbols include a first symbol set and a second symbol set, and the phase of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set a phase difference between the difference and the PTRS sequence on the second set of symbols is used to indicate a precoding manner when the terminal device communicates using the first resource unit, and/or the network device sends the terminal to the terminal by using the first resource unit The power adjustment method when the device sends data.
  • the precoding mode when the terminal device uses the first resource unit to communicate is a non-linear precoding mode, where the method further includes:
  • the terminal device receives the third indication information that is sent by the network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, and the number of bits of the third indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, where each bit in the third indication information is used to indicate The power adjustment method corresponding to a resource unit.
  • the method further includes:
  • the terminal device receives the fourth indication information that is sent by the network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the terminal device, where the MCS is used to indicate that the network device uses the first resource unit to The power adjustment method when the terminal device sends data.
  • a communication device comprising various modules or units for performing the method of the first aspect or any of the possible implementations of the first aspect.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • a communication device comprising various modules or units for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the second aspect or the second aspect.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is for controlling transceiver transceiver signals for storing a computer program for calling and running the computer program from memory such that the network device performs the method of the first aspect and its possible implementations.
  • the communication device is a network device.
  • a communication device including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory.
  • the processor is for controlling transceiver transceiver signals for storing a computer program for calling and running the computer program from memory such that the terminal device performs the method of the second aspect and its possible implementations.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • a computer readable medium having stored thereon a computer program, which when executed by a computer, implements the method of any of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the first aspect.
  • a computer readable medium having stored thereon a computer program, which when executed by a computer, implements the method of any of the possible implementations of the second aspect or the second aspect.
  • a computer program product is provided, the computer program product being executed by a computer to implement the method of any of the first aspect or the first aspect of the first aspect.
  • a computer program product which when executed by a computer, implements the method of any of the possible implementations of the second aspect or the second aspect.
  • a processing apparatus including a processor and an interface
  • the processor for performing the method as an execution body of the method in any of the first aspect, the second aspect, the first aspect, or the second aspect, wherein the related data interaction process (for example, Or receive data transmission) is done through the above interface.
  • the foregoing interface may further complete the data interaction process by using a transceiver.
  • the processing device in the eleventh aspect may be a chip, and the processor may be implemented by using hardware or by software.
  • the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like;
  • the processor can be a general purpose processor implemented by reading software code stored in a memory, which can be integrated in the processor and can exist independently of the processor.
  • a system comprising the aforementioned network device and terminal device.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a data processing process in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a constellation diagram in accordance with one embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a communication device in accordance with an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiments of the present application are applicable to various communication systems, and therefore, the following description is not limited to a specific communication system.
  • the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a long term evolution (LTE) system, a frequency division duplex (FDD) system, a time division duplex (TDD), a wireless local area network (wireless local area). Networks, WLAN), wireless fidelity (WiFi), and next-generation communication systems, ie, 5th generation (5G) communication systems, such as the new radio (NR) system.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • TDD time division duplex
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • WiFi wireless fidelity
  • 5G 5th generation
  • NR new radio
  • the network device may be a network device in a 5G network, for example, a transmission and reception point (TRP or transmission point TP) in the NR system, a base station (gNB) in the NR system, and an NR system.
  • a radio frequency unit such as a remote radio unit, one or a group of base stations (including multiple antenna panels), and the like in a 5G system. It can also be a wearable device or an in-vehicle device. Different network devices may be located in the same cell or in different cells, and are not limited herein.
  • a gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU).
  • the gNB may also include a radio unit (RU).
  • the CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB.
  • the CU implements radio resource control (RRC), the function of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, and the DU implements the wireless chain.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • PDCP packet data convergence protocol
  • the DU implements the wireless chain.
  • the functions of the radio link control (RLC), the media access control (MAC), and the physical (PHY) layer Since the information of the RRC layer eventually becomes information of the PHY layer or is transformed by the information of the PHY layer, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling or PHCP layer signaling, can also be used in this architecture.
  • the network device can be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node.
  • the CU may be divided into network devices in the access network RAN, and the CU may be divided into network devices in the core network CN, which is not limited herein.
  • the terminal device may also be referred to as a user equipment (UE), an access terminal, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, and a terminal.
  • UE user equipment
  • the access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), with wireless communication.
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, household appliances, wearable devices, drone devices, and terminal devices in future 5G networks or future extended public land mobile communication networks are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • a wearable device which can also be called a wearable smart device, is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design and wear wearable devices such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are more than just a hardware device, but they also implement powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • Generalized wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-size, non-reliable smartphones for full or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and focus on only one type of application, and need to work with other devices such as smartphones. Use, such as various smart bracelets for smart signs monitoring, smart jewelry, etc.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication system 100 includes a network device 102, which may include multiple antenna groups.
  • Each antenna group may include multiple antennas, for example, one antenna group may include antennas 104 and 106, another antenna group may include antennas 106 and 110, and an additional group may include antennas 112 and 114.
  • Two antennas are shown in Figure 1 for each antenna group, although more or fewer antennas may be used for each group.
  • Network device 102 may additionally include a transmitter chain and a receiver chain, as will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art, which may include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (eg, processor, modulator, multiplexer, solution) Tuner, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.).
  • a transmitter chain and a receiver chain may include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (eg, processor, modulator, multiplexer, solution) Tuner, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.).
  • Network device 102 can communicate with a plurality of terminal devices, such as terminal device 116 and terminal device 122. However, it will be appreciated that network device 102 can communicate with any number of terminal devices similar to terminal device 116 or 122.
  • Terminal devices 116 and 122 may be, for example, cellular telephones, smart phones, portable computers, handheld communication devices, handheld computing devices, satellite radios, global positioning systems, PDAs, and/or any other suitable for communicating over wireless communication system 100. device.
  • terminal device 116 is in communication with antennas 112 and 114, wherein antennas 112 and 114 transmit information to terminal device 116 over forward link 116 and receive information from terminal device 116 over reverse link 120.
  • terminal device 122 is in communication with antennas 104 and 106, wherein antennas 104 and 106 transmit information to terminal device 122 over forward link 124 and receive information from terminal device 122 over reverse link 126.
  • the forward link 116 can utilize a different frequency band than that used by the reverse link 120, and the forward link 124 can utilize the reverse link. 126 different frequency bands used.
  • FDD frequency division duplex
  • the forward link 116 and the reverse link 120 can use a common frequency band, a forward link 124, and a reverse link.
  • Link 126 can use a common frequency band.
  • Each set of antennas and/or regions designed for communication is referred to as a sector of network device 102.
  • the antenna group can be designed to communicate with terminal devices in sectors of the network device 102 coverage area.
  • the transmit antennas of network device 102 may utilize beamforming to improve the signal to noise ratio of forward links 116 and 124.
  • the network device 102 uses beamforming to transmit signals to the randomly dispersed terminal devices 116 and 122 in the relevant coverage area, the network device 102 uses a single antenna to transmit signals to all of its terminal devices. Mobile devices are subject to less interference.
  • network device 102, terminal device 116, or terminal device 122 may be a wireless communication transmitting device and/or a wireless communication receiving device.
  • the wireless communication transmitting device can encode the data for transmission.
  • the wireless communication transmitting device may acquire (eg, generate, receive from other communication devices, or store in memory, etc.) a certain number of data bits to be transmitted over the channel to the wireless communication receiving device.
  • Such data bits may be included in a transport block (or multiple transport blocks) of data that may be segmented to produce multiple code blocks.
  • the communication system 100 may be a public land mobile network PLMN network or a device to device (D2D) network or a machine to machine (M2M) network or other network, and FIG. 1 is merely an example for convenience of understanding.
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • D2D device to device
  • M2M machine to machine
  • FIG. 1 is merely an example for convenience of understanding.
  • a simplified schematic diagram of the network may also include other network devices, which are not shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 2 shows the main steps of a data processing process performed by a transmitting end (for example, a network device) before data is transmitted by orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols.
  • a transmitting end for example, a network device
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • the receiving end e.g., the terminal device
  • the specific data processing procedures described above can be referred to the description in the existing standards.
  • MIMO uses multiple transmit antennas to transmit signals with the same information through different paths, and at the receiving end can obtain multiple independent fading of the same data symbol. Signals, thereby achieving improved reception reliability for diversity, spatial diversity of MIMO techniques can be used to combat channel fading.
  • the precoding technology can not only effectively suppress multiple user interferences in the MIMO system, but also significantly improve the system capacity while greatly simplifying the receiver algorithm.
  • the precoding uses the known channel state information CSI to preprocess the transmitted signal at the transmitting end, so that the processed transmitted signal can adapt to the channel environment, thereby eliminating interference between users, reducing the system error rate and improving the system. Capacity, reduce transmit power, etc.
  • Typical precoding methods can be divided into linear precoding and nonlinear precoding. Each type of precoding has its suitable working scenario. Linear precoding and nonlinear precoding are introduced separately below.
  • Linear precoding is the linear processing of the acquired channel state information.
  • a typical linear precoding algorithm may include zero forcing (ZF) precoding and its various improved algorithms, minimum mean square error (MMSE) precoding, block diagonalization (BD).
  • ZF zero forcing
  • MMSE minimum mean square error
  • BD block diagonalization
  • Precoding and optimization of signal to leakage noise ratio (SLNR) precoding are important to improve linear precoding.
  • SLNR signal to leakage noise ratio
  • the advantage of linear precoding is that it has low operation complexity, simple implementation and strong practicability, but it is greatly affected by channel correlation. Because the channel matrix H is ill, the equivalent noise at the receiving end will increase, which will affect the demodulation. And detection leads to loss of system performance.
  • Nonlinear precoding is a non-linear operation of the channel matrix (such as introducing iteration, interference cancellation, modulo, power back-off).
  • Typical nonlinear precoding methods can include dirty paper coding (DPC), modular algebra Precoding (tomlinson harashima precoding, THP) and vector perturbation (VP) precoding.
  • DPC dirty paper coding
  • THP modular algebra Precoding
  • VP vector perturbation
  • the network device needs to determine the precoding method for data processing as linear precoding mode or non according to different channel conditions, balancing complexity and performance.
  • Linear precoding method Since the performance and complexity of the linear precoding and nonlinear precoding methods are different, the network device needs to determine the precoding method for data processing as linear precoding mode or non according to different channel conditions, balancing complexity and performance. Linear precoding method.
  • the network device can determine the precoding mode of the terminal device in the full bandwidth according to the channel correlation of the terminal device in full bandwidth.
  • the channel correlation between the terminal devices is small due to the small system bandwidth.
  • the change in the full bandwidth is small, and the pre-coding mode between each terminal device can be accurately determined by using the full-bandwidth channel correlation.
  • the system bandwidth can be as high as 400M, and the maximum bandwidth supported by each terminal device is greatly different. At this time, the channel correlation between terminal devices is difficult to be consistent in the system bandwidth.
  • the pre-coding mode of the terminal device is still determined by using the full-bandwidth channel correlation, which may result in inaccurate selection of the pre-coding mode and affect system performance.
  • the embodiment of the present application proposes a method for determining a precoding method. Specifically, the network device determines, according to the channel correlation value of the terminal device on the resource unit, a precoding manner corresponding to each terminal device on the resource unit. In the embodiment of the present application, the network device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity. The precoding method corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the terminal device in the prior art is determined to determine a full bandwidth. The shortcomings of the precoding method. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit by using the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
  • the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application indicates the precoding mode used by the network device to send data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • precoding mode in this document may also be referred to as a precoding scheme, a precoding mode, a precoding class or a precoding type, etc., and the implementation of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • power adjustment mode in this document may also be referred to as a power adjustment scheme, a power adjustment mode, a power adjustment category, or a power adjustment type, etc., and the implementation of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • full bandwidth in the embodiment of the present application may indicate the system bandwidth, or the total bandwidth that the system can schedule.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flow chart of a method of communication according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method shown in FIG. 3 describes the method of the embodiment of the present application from the perspective of interaction between the network device and the terminal device. Specifically, the method shown in FIG. 3 includes:
  • the network device determines a plurality of channel correlation values of the plurality of terminal devices on the first resource unit.
  • the plurality of terminal devices include devices that communicate using the first resource unit, and each of the plurality of channel correlation values represents a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices .
  • each channel correlation value represents the degree of interference between each two terminal devices, and when there are n plurality of terminal devices communicating using the first resource unit, then the plurality of channels corresponding to the n terminal devices Correlation values include One.
  • the multiple correspondence value may include (ie, 3) channel correlation values, that is, channel correlation values corresponding to the first terminal device and the second terminal device, correlation values corresponding to the first terminal device and the third terminal device, and the second value The channel correlation value corresponding to the third terminal device of the terminal device.
  • the value of the channel correlation indicates the degree of interference between two terminal devices communicating using the first resource unit.
  • the degree of interference between the two terminal devices is greater, and vice versa.
  • the smaller the channel correlation value the smaller the degree of interference between the two terminal devices.
  • the number of receiving antennas of each terminal device is 1, and the channel between the network device and the kth terminal device is represented as Hk, and the dimension is 1*Nt, where Nt is the number of transmitting antennas of the network device.
  • Nt is the number of transmitting antennas of the network device.
  • SSD singular value decomposition
  • the channel correlation between the two terminal devices refers to: the modulus of the main right singular vector inner product between the two terminal devices or the main right singular vector of one of the two terminal devices in another terminal device
  • the factor affecting the inner product size is the angle between the data transmission directions of the terminal devices.
  • the resource unit may represent a bandwidth resource.
  • one resource unit is a bandwidth resource in the system bandwidth.
  • one resource unit is a plurality of resource blocks (RBs) or several resource blocks.
  • multiple resource units can be included in the system bandwidth.
  • resource units can be divided into 10M bandwidth, 20M bandwidth, and 50M bandwidth. That is to say, for each resource unit, the network device needs to perform the same processing as the first resource unit.
  • the value of the first resource unit may be less than or equal to the minimum scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
  • the scheduling bandwidth of any terminal device may be an integer multiple of the first resource unit.
  • the resource unit may also be referred to as a sub-band, a resource granularity, or a resource set, and the like, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the size of the first resource unit may be determined in multiple manners. The details will be described separately below.
  • the size of the first resource unit is preset, that is, the size of the first resource unit is the system default.
  • the network device and the terminal device know the size of the first resource unit in advance, and it is not necessary to determine the size of the first resource unit.
  • the network device may directly determine the precoding mode by using the method in the embodiment of the present application according to the default first resource unit size.
  • the terminal device can directly demodulate the received data by using the method of the embodiment of the present application according to the default first resource unit size.
  • the network device and the terminal device do not need to confirm the size of the resource unit in the embodiment of the present application, and the network device does not need to send signaling to the terminal device to indicate the size of the resource unit. Applying an embodiment can save resources and reduce signaling overhead.
  • the size of the first resource unit is determined by the network device.
  • the network device first determines the size of the first resource unit, and then needs to indicate the size of the resource unit of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device determines a size of the first resource unit
  • the network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the size of the first resource unit.
  • the terminal device receives the first indication information.
  • the first indication information may be high layer signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling, or may be medium access control (MAC) layer signaling.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • MAC medium access control
  • the embodiment may not be limited to the downlink control information (DCI), or the broadcast information.
  • the network device determines a specific possible implementation manner of the size of the first resource unit:
  • the network device determines the size of the first resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of channel correlation of the total bandwidth of each two terminal devices.
  • the slower the channel correlation change of the two terminal devices on the full bandwidth the larger the resource unit
  • the faster the channel correlation of the two terminal devices on the full bandwidth changes the smaller the resource unit.
  • the size of the resource unit is directly related to the performance of the non-linear pre-coding.
  • the embodiment of the present application determines the size of the resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of the channel correlation of the terminal device on the full bandwidth by using the most intuitive method. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the size of the resource unit.
  • the size of the appropriate resource unit can be determined flexibly according to the channel state.
  • the network device needs to resend the first indication information to indicate the latest resource unit size, and determine the precoding manner according to the updated resource unit size.
  • the network device may not need to send the first indication information, and the terminal device may follow the indication of the network device during the last data transmission. Determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current data transmission.
  • the network device may also send the first indication information to indicate the size of the resource unit, regardless of whether the size of the resource unit changes.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the size of the resource unit may be periodically updated in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto, 40 ms, 80 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 400 ms, 800 ms, 1600 ms, ... and the like.
  • the embodiment of the present application can periodically determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current channel state by periodically updating the resource unit size, and further determine the precoding mode according to the size of the updated resource unit, thereby improving system performance.
  • the embodiment of the present application may also update the size of the resource unit aperiodically.
  • the size update of a resource unit is triggered by a network device or a terminal device.
  • the network device Triggered by the network device: the network device according to the obtained channel state information of each terminal device (the channel state information may include at least one of the following: a channel estimated by a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS), and feedback by the terminal device Channel state information (CSI), channel quality indicator (CQI), precoding matrix indicator (PMI), rank indicator (RI), interference information, etc.
  • SRS Sounding Reference Signal
  • CSI Channel state information
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • PMI precoding matrix indicator
  • RI rank indicator
  • interference information etc.
  • the channel state information is compared. When the difference exceeds a certain threshold, the size of the resource unit and the precoding mode are re-determined.
  • the terminal device acquires its current channel state information (the channel state information may include at least one of: a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) and/or a channel state information reference signal (channel state information) Referencesignal, CSI-RS) and/or phase tracking reference signal (PTRS) and/or other reference signal (RS) estimated channel, etc.) compared with previous channel state information, when the difference
  • DMRS demodulation reference signal
  • CSI-RS channel state information reference signal
  • PTRS phase tracking reference signal
  • RS reference signal
  • the request for updating the size of the resource unit and the precoding method, and/or the recommended resource unit size (the message content may be an absolute value of the resource unit size, or an index of the resource unit size) may be sent to the network device. Or number).
  • the network device may choose to update or not update the resource unit size after receiving the request and/or suggested value.
  • the network device or the terminal device flexibly updates the resource unit size according to the channel state information by using the network device or the terminal device, and can determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current channel state in time when the channel state changes greatly.
  • the precoding method is determined according to the size of the updated resource unit, which can improve system performance.
  • the network device determines the size of the first resource unit according to the size of the scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices.
  • the network device may determine the size of the resource unit according to the scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices.
  • the larger the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device the larger the absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit or the larger the number of RBs included, the smaller the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, the absolute bandwidth occupied by the resource unit (in MHz) or The smaller the number of RBs included.
  • the scheduling bandwidths of the multiple terminal devices may not be completely the same, and the network device may determine the size of multiple different resource units according to the scheduling bandwidth of different terminal devices.
  • the network The device may determine a value as the final resource unit size according to the size of the plurality of different resource units. For example, the minimum value, the maximum value, the intermediate value, or the average value of the multiple values are taken as the size of the final resource unit, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the resource unit size can be directly determined by the scheduling bandwidth, that is, both the network device and the terminal device can determine the resource unit size according to the scheduling bandwidth, and no additional Signaling indicates the size of the resource unit.
  • the size of the resource unit is equal across the entire system bandwidth.
  • the network device determines a size of the first resource unit according to a size of a subcarrier interval in a scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices. It should be understood that the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the plurality of terminal devices is generally the same.
  • the network device may determine the size of the resource unit according to the subcarrier spacing of the terminal device. For example, the network device may determine a resource unit size according to the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device. For example, the larger the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, the fewer the number of RBs included in the resource unit; The smaller the interval, the more RBs the resource unit contains; or the larger the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, the larger the absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit, and the smaller the subcarrier spacing of the terminal device. The absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit is smaller.
  • the network device may determine a resource unit size corresponding to the current subcarrier according to a one-to-one correspondence between the preset multiple subcarrier spacings and the multiple resource unit sizes. It should be understood that the sub-carrier spacing of the devices of the multiple terminals in the resource unit is the same, and the resource unit size can be directly determined by the sub-carrier spacing, that is, the network device and the terminal device can determine the resource unit size according to the sub-carrier spacing, and the Additional signaling indicates the size of the resource unit.
  • the network device can flexibly determine the size of the appropriate resource unit according to the size of the subcarrier spacing.
  • the network device selects one of the preset multiple resource unit size values as the size of the first resource unit.
  • the resource unit size includes a resource unit size (Resource Block Group, RBG), where the value of n may be a positive integer, or may be a positive integer satisfying a power of 2; or
  • the resource unit size set includes a resource unit size of n resource blocks (Resource Blocks, RBs), where n may be an integer, or may be a positive integer satisfying a power of 2; or a resource included in a set of resource unit sizes
  • the size of the resource unit is directly selected from the set, which can reduce the complexity of the implementation and reduce the signaling overhead.
  • the network device selects one of the preset values of the multiple resource unit sizes as the size of the first resource unit, including:
  • the network device is configured according to at least one of a predetermined plurality of resource unit sizes according to at least one of a degree of fluctuation of channel correlation between the terminal devices, a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a size of a subcarrier interval in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
  • One of the values is selected as the size of the first resource unit.
  • the network device may also select the state of the current channel, such as according to the channel correlation between the terminal devices. Sex, select the closest value in the collection or the closest value after the logarithm as the resource unit size.
  • the largest i in ⁇ 1 which can also satisfy the minimum i of (x/SubBW i ) ⁇ 1, and can also be the i that makes (x/SubBW i ) closest to 1, such as abs((x/) SubBW i )-1)
  • the smallest i the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the resource unit size set is ⁇ 400M, 200M, 100M, 50M ⁇
  • one of the alternatives is to select 50M.
  • the size of the resource unit when the resource unit size determined by the channel correlation between the terminal devices is greater than 75M and less than 150M, one of the alternatives is to select 100M as the resource unit size.
  • the relationship between the subcarrier spacing and/or the scheduling bandwidth size and the resource unit size in the set may also be established or configured in advance, and then the network device selects the subcarrier spacing and/or the scheduling bandwidth according to the current data.
  • One of the resource unit size sets determines the size of the resource unit.
  • the network device and the terminal device determine the size of the first resource unit in the same manner or rule.
  • the same resource unit size can be determined by the same method or rule at both ends of the transceiver. Therefore, the network device does not need to send an indication of the size of the additional resource unit to the terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device determines a size of the first resource unit according to a preset parameter, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may also determine the size of the first resource unit according to preset parameters.
  • the network device may determine the size of the resource unit according to the preset parameter by using a set of preset manners or rules that are the same as the terminal device.
  • the resource unit size used to determine the precoding mode when the data is currently transmitted may be separated by the subcarrier spacing and/or Or scheduling bandwidth implicit indication, for example, if the resource unit size in the set is ⁇ 25 RB, 50 RB, 100 RB ⁇ , respectively corresponding to the subcarrier spacing ⁇ 120k, 60k, 30k ⁇ ; if the resource unit size It is ⁇ 16 RBs, 32 RBs, 64 RBs, 128 RBs ⁇ , corresponding to the subcarrier spacing ⁇ 240k, 120k, 60k, 30k ⁇ , and so on.
  • the network device and the terminal device may determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the subcarrier according to the correspondence between the subcarrier spacing and the size of the resource unit.
  • the network device and the terminal device determine the size of the resource unit according to the same rule. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the size of the resource unit of the terminal device by using signaling, which can reduce the complexity of the implementation and reduce the number of the information. Make the cost.
  • the network device determines, according to the multiple channel correlation values, a precoding manner corresponding to each of the plurality of terminal devices.
  • the first terminal device corresponds to the first precoding mode, and the first terminal device is any one of the multiple terminal devices.
  • the network device transmits a total of five layers of data.
  • the network device can determine the precoding mode corresponding to each terminal device by the following steps:
  • Step 1 The network device obtains the channels of the five terminal devices, respectively, channel 1, channel 2, ..., channel 5
  • Step 2 The network device separately calculates the channel correlation value between each two terminal devices, and obtains a correlation matrix R with a dimension of N*N, that is, 5*5, where R pq represents the pth terminal device and the qth terminal device.
  • a method for determining the correlation matrix is to first determine the correlation of the jth RBG last UE when the ith TTI is first, and then average the RBG to obtain a resource unit.
  • Correlation matrix R (i) where i represents the index of the TTI and j represents the index of the RBG in a resource unit
  • the correlation matrix acquired in each time slot is used.
  • the correlation matrix obtained in step 2 is:
  • Step 3 Select the terminal device of the first layer.
  • the network device needs to select the terminal devices of each layer according to the correlation matrix.
  • Method A Calculate the average correlation between each terminal device and other terminal devices, and select the terminal device with the least correlation as the first layer terminal device.
  • the average channel correlation values of the five terminal devices are: 0.386, 0.640, 0.456, 0.664, and 0.522, respectively.
  • the first terminal device has the smallest average correlation, so it is the first layer terminal device.
  • the result of calculating the average correlation of the terminal device includes the UE's own correlation with itself, that is, the diagonal element is included, and the average correlation of the terminal device is sum(R)/5, where sum( R) means summing each row or column of the matrix.
  • the diagonal element may not be averaged, that is, the average correlation of the computing terminal device is (sum(R)-1)/4.
  • Mode B The threshold of the predefined or default or configuration correlation is ⁇ R , and the size of R ij is compared, and the channel correlation between each terminal device and other terminal devices is smaller than ⁇ R (or less than or equal to ⁇ R ). The number of correlations, the most selected terminal device is the first layer terminal device
  • the channel correlations with other terminal devices in the five terminal devices are less than (or less than or equal to) the number of ⁇ R is (ie, less than the other elements of the R elements in each column other than the diagonal elements)
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the terminal device with the smallest label among the plurality of terminal devices scheduled by the network device is the first layer terminal device, that is, the terminal device 1.
  • each terminal device corresponds to one identifier or label, for example, the label of the terminal device 1 to the terminal device 5 is other numbers 1 to 5, the network device can select the terminal device with the smallest label, that is, the terminal device 1 as the first A layer of terminal equipment.
  • Step 4 Select the terminal devices of other layers.
  • the network device may sort the scheduling terminal devices according to channel correlation. For example, the terminal devices ranked as i are scheduled at the i-th layer, and the pre-coding manner of each terminal device is determined according to the channel correlation. Specifically, the network device sequentially confirms the second layer, the third layer, and the nth layer terminal device. For example, based on the sorted i-1 layer terminal device, the average correlation between the remaining terminal devices and the currently sorted pre-i-1 layer terminal devices is sequentially calculated, and the terminal device with the smallest average correlation is selected as the i-th.
  • the terminal device of the layer compares the average channel correlation value of the i-th terminal device corresponding to the currently sorted pre-i-1 layer terminal device with the pre-defined or configured linear precoding correlation threshold ⁇ NonTHP , If the average average channel correlation value is less than or equal to (or less than) ⁇ NonTHP , the precoding mode corresponding to the i th layer terminal device is a linear precoding mode, otherwise it is a nonlinear precoding mode.
  • the following is a specific example of determining the second to fifth layers of the network device by taking ⁇ NonTHP as 0.4 as an example.
  • the correlation between the remaining terminal devices (the terminal device 2 to the terminal device 5) and the first layer terminal device is [0.15, 0.14, 0.40, 0.24], respectively, where the correlation with the terminal device 1 is The smallest terminal device is the terminal device 3, and thus the terminal device 3 is a second layer terminal device.
  • Determining the terminal device of the third layer between the remaining terminal devices (terminal device 2, terminal device 4, terminal device 5) and the first layer terminal device (terminal device 1) and the second layer terminal device (terminal device 3)
  • the average correlation is [0.5, 0.32, 0.145], respectively, so the terminal device 5 is the terminal device of the third layer.
  • the final determined terminal device order and the average channel correlation used in determining the order are: [terminal device 1 (0.386), terminal device 3 (0.14), terminal device 5 (0.145), terminal device 2 (0.4733) ), the terminal device 4 (0.58)], wherein the average correlation between the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 4 is greater than ⁇ NonTHP , and therefore, the precoding method corresponding to the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 4 is nonlinear precoding.
  • the average correlation between the terminal device 3 and the terminal device 5 is less than ⁇ NonTHP , and therefore, the precoding method corresponding to the terminal device 3 and the terminal device 4 is linear precoding.
  • the terminal device 1 is located at the first layer and is not interfered by other terminal devices.
  • the precoding mode adopted by the terminal device 1 can be selected in a linear and nonlinear precoding manner according to actual conditions, when the remaining When the other terminal equipment is non-linearly precoded or the first terminal equipment behind it is nonlinear precoding, the terminal equipment 1 can select nonlinear precoding, and the first terminal equipment behind it is linear pre- At the time of encoding, the terminal device 1 selects linear precoding.
  • the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device may be determined according to other parameters of the channel, such as the energy of the channel, the signal to interference and noise ratio of the terminal device, or the like; or The precoding method corresponding to the terminal device is determined by using other scheduling algorithms and the like, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the network device determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device, the network device needs to indicate the precoding mode corresponding to the corresponding terminal device.
  • the network device may explicitly indicate the precoding mode, or may implicitly indicate the precoding mode.
  • the method may further include:
  • the network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
  • the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device, where the Each bit in the two indication information is used to indicate a precoding manner corresponding to one resource unit.
  • the precoding mode of each resource unit may be explicitly indicated in the form of a bitmap. If the number of resource units is four, the bitmap has four bits, for example, 0110 indicates four.
  • the precoding method on the resource unit is ⁇ linear precoding, nonlinear precoding, nonlinear precoding, linear precoding ⁇ , or ⁇ nonlinear precoding, linear precoding, linear precoding, nonlinear precoding ⁇ .
  • the embodiment of the present application indicates the precoding mode in an explicit manner. Therefore, the terminal device can directly determine the precoding mode corresponding to each resource unit according to the second indication information, and does not need an additional calculation process, thereby reducing implementation complexity. .
  • the method may further include:
  • the network device sends a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence to indicate a precoding manner by using the first resource unit, and a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence (also referred to as a DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence)
  • the phase difference between the transmitted signals is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit.
  • the received signals of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence have a reception phase error.
  • the reception phase error represents the difference between the phase difference between the received signals of the DMRS sequence and the sequence of the PTRS, and the phase difference between the transmitted signals. For example, when the phase difference of the transmitted signal is 0, the received phase error is equal to the phase difference between the received signal of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence.
  • the precoding manner of the resource unit may be determined by the phase difference of the transmitted signal between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence, such as:
  • Linear precoding The PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence are identical, with a phase difference of 0°.
  • Nonlinear precoding The PTRS sequence is opposite to the DMRS sequence with a phase difference of 180°.
  • the phase difference of the transmitted signals of the two sequences may simultaneously indicate the precoding mode and the power adjustment mode, and the precoding method and The correspondence between the sequence phase differences (phase difference of the transmitted signals) is as follows:
  • Linear precoding The PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence are identical, that is, the phase difference is 0°.
  • Nonlinear precoding, and modulo adjustment power the phase difference between the PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence is 2/3 ⁇ .
  • Nonlinear precoding, and power back-off adjustment power PTRS sequence and DMRS sequence phase difference is -2/3 ⁇ .
  • the implicit indication method may be extended to phase between PTRS sequences on two or more PTRS symbols. difference.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends a PTRS sequence by using a plurality of symbols in the first resource unit, where the plurality of symbols includes a first symbol set and a second symbol set, a phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set and the second
  • the transmit signal phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the set of symbols is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit.
  • the sequence phase of PTRS on all symbols is exactly the same to indicate linear precoding;
  • the phase difference between the sequence phase of the PTRS on the odd symbol and the PTRS sequence on the even symbol is 180° indicating nonlinear precoding, or the phase difference is 2/3 ⁇ indicating non Linear precoding, and modulo adjustment power;
  • the phase difference between the sequence phase of the PTRS on the odd symbol and the PTRS sequence on the even symbol is -2/3 ⁇ indicating nonlinear precoding, and the power back is adjusted to adjust the power;
  • the odd and even numbers can also be
  • the information is replaced by the first n and the last m, that is, the PTRS sequence on the first n PTRS symbols and the PTRS phase on the last m PTRS symbols represent different information.
  • the embodiment of the present application indicates the precoding mode in an implicit manner. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the precoding mode by signaling, which can save signaling overhead.
  • the network device in order to adjust the power that is lifted due to the subtraction of the interference.
  • the network device needs to adjust the power of the transmitted data.
  • the network device can adopt the following two power adjustment modes.
  • the first type of power adjustment is: modulo mode.
  • the interference-cancelled signal is mapped back into the original constellation where the current modulation scheme is located.
  • the signal formula after modulo can be expressed as:
  • T is the size of the original constellation, which is related to the modulation order.
  • the modulation order is 2, 4, and 6 is 4/sqrt(2), 8/sqrt(10), respectively. 16/sqrt(42);
  • X' is the signal after modulo
  • n, m is a unique integer value such that both the real part and the imaginary part of X' are in the set [-sqrt(T)/2, sqrt(T)/2];
  • the abscissa represents the in-phase component
  • the ordinate represents the orthogonal component.
  • the range of the original constellation is identified by a black solid line frame, and the extended constellation is represented by a dashed box, if the original signal is The constellation point is A. After interference cancellation, it becomes signal B.
  • the modulo operation is to fold B back to the corresponding point within the original constellation map, that is, C shown in the figure, where B is relative position in the extended constellation. The same position as C in the original constellation.
  • the second power adjustment mode is: power backoff mode. Assuming that each terminal device is a single stream, the signal after the interference cancellation power backoff of the kth terminal device is:
  • a k represents the original signal of the kth terminal device
  • ⁇ k represents the power backoff factor
  • the network device In order to enable the terminal device to correctly demodulate data, the network device needs to indicate whether the power adjustment mode of the terminal device is the foregoing first or second power adjustment mode.
  • the network device in the non-linear precoding mode, may explicitly indicate the power adjustment mode, or may implicitly indicate the power adjustment mode.
  • the precoding mode when the first terminal device uses the first resource unit to communicate is a non-linear precoding mode
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the third indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device, where Each bit in the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment manner corresponding to one resource unit.
  • the power adjustment mode of each resource unit may be indicated in the form of a bitmap. For example, if the number of resource units is 4 and four resource units, the bitmap has 4 bits, such as four.
  • 0110 indicates that the precoding methods on the four resource units are ⁇ modulo, power back, power back, modulo ⁇ , or ⁇ power back, modulo, modulo , power back ⁇ ; if the precoding mode of the terminal equipment on some of the resource units is linear precoding, the power adjustment mode indicated by the bitmap is invalid.
  • the power adjustment mode is directly indicated in the embodiment of the present application. Therefore, the terminal device can directly determine the power adjustment mode corresponding to each resource unit according to the second indication information, and the implementation complexity can be reduced without an additional calculation process.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends, by using the first resource unit, a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence, and a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence (which may also be referred to as a DMRS sequence and a transmission signal of the PTRS sequence)
  • the phase difference is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the method is the same as the implicit indication method of the precoding method, that is, the power adjustment mode is determined by the phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence transmission signal.
  • the received signal of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence itself has a reception phase error due to factors such as phase noise.
  • the reception phase error represents the difference between the phase difference between the received signals of the DMRS sequence and the sequence of the PTRS, and the phase difference between the transmitted signals. For example, when the phase difference of the transmitted signal is 0, the received phase error is equal to the phase difference between the received signal of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence.
  • phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence transmitting the signal
  • Modulating power adjustment The PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence are identical, and the phase difference is 0°.
  • the PTRS sequence is opposite to the DMRS sequence, and the phase difference is 180°.
  • phase difference of the transmitted signals of the two sequences may simultaneously indicate the precoding mode and the power adjustment mode.
  • the correspondence between the power adjustment method and the sequence phase difference is as follows:
  • Linear precoding The PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence are identical, with a phase difference of 0°.
  • Nonlinear precoding, and modulo adjustment power PTRS sequence and DMRS sequence phase difference is 2/3 ⁇ (pi).
  • Nonlinear precoding, and power back-off adjustment power PTRS sequence and DMRS sequence phase difference is -2/3 ⁇ .
  • the implicit indication method may be extended to a phase difference of a transmission signal between PTRS sequences on two or more PTRS symbols.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends a PTRS sequence by using a plurality of symbols in the first resource unit, where the plurality of symbols includes a first symbol set and a second symbol set, a phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set and the second
  • the phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the symbol set is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • sequence phase of PTRS on all symbols is exactly the same, indicating modulo adjustment power; or,
  • phase difference between the sequence phase of the PTRS on the odd symbol and the PTRS sequence on the even symbol is 180°, indicating power back adjustment power;
  • a phase difference of 2/3 ⁇ indicates nonlinear precoding and modulo power adjustment
  • the phase difference between the sequence phase of the PTRS on the odd symbol and the PTRS sequence on the even symbol is -2/3 ⁇ indicating nonlinear precoding, and the power back is adjusted to adjust the power; wherein the odd and even numbers can also be replaced by the first n and the last m. That is, the PTRS sequence on the first n PTRS symbols and the PTRS phase on the last m PTRS symbols represent different information.
  • the foregoing describes a scheme in which a phase difference between a PTRS sequence and a DMRS sequence is used, or a phase difference between PTRS sequences on two or more PTRS symbols indicates a constant power adjustment mode. Since the power loss introduced by using the modulo in the embodiment of the present application is different in different modulation modes, specifically, the higher the modulation mode, the power loss introduced by the modulo is about low. Therefore, the power adjustment mode may be selected according to the modulation mode of the terminal device.
  • the method further includes:
  • the network device sends a fourth indication information to the first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the first terminal device, where the MCS is used to indicate that the network device passes the first resource.
  • the power adjustment mode when the unit transmits data to the first terminal device.
  • High-order modulation mode modulo, if the modulation mode is 16QAM or above, or when the modulation order is greater than or equal to m, the value of m can be 4, 6, ....
  • Low-order modulation mode power back-off, if the modulation mode is below QPSK or QPSK, or the power is backed off when the modulation order is less than m, where the value of m can be 4, 6, ....
  • the power adjustment mode is indicated in an implicit manner in the embodiment of the present application. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the power adjustment mode by signaling, which can save signaling overhead.
  • the network device in the embodiment of the present application needs to send two types of information, that is, a precoding method and a power adjustment mode indication (which may be an implicit indication or an explicit indication) to the terminal device.
  • a precoding method and a power adjustment mode indication (which may be an implicit indication or an explicit indication)
  • a power adjustment mode indication which may be an implicit indication or an explicit indication
  • the various indication methods described above may be used in any combination, for example, by way of example and not limitation, the embodiment of the present application may indicate the precoding mode and the power adjustment mode by using any combination of the following:
  • the explicit method notifies the precoding method, and the implicit method notifies the power adjustment mode, wherein the implicit method can arbitrarily select a combination of any one or more of the implicit indication schemes listed above.
  • the implicit method notifies the precoding method, wherein the implicit method may select a combination of any one or more of the implicit indication schemes listed above, and the explicit method notifies the power adjustment mode.
  • the implicit method notifies the precoding mode, and the implicit method notifies the power adjustment mode, wherein the specific indication methods of the two can be combined, for example, the value range of the phase difference of the corresponding sequence transmission signal is included in (- ⁇ /3, ⁇ /3).
  • the time scenario can also be separated by different methods, such as precoding, using the phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence to transmit the signal or the phase difference indication of the PTRS sequence on the different symbols.
  • the number of implicit indications and the like, the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
  • the precoding mode indicates a higher priority, that is, the power adjustment mode is effective only when the precoding mode is a nonlinear precoding mode. Otherwise invalid.
  • the foregoing description of the application in the present application describes a plurality of resource units in the full bandwidth, and may indicate, in an implicit manner, a precoding mode and/or a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data through the resource unit.
  • the implicit indication method may also be extended to full bandwidth, that is, after the network device determines the precoding mode and/or the power adjustment mode when transmitting data through the full bandwidth, the above implicit mode may be adopted.
  • the schemes of the precoding mode and/or the power adjustment mode refer to the description above, and details are not described herein again.
  • the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit in a first precoding manner corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives data transmitted by the network device.
  • the terminal device processes the received data according to a corresponding precoding manner.
  • the network device may indicate the precoding mode according to the scheme described above (which may be an implicit indication or an explicit indication), and the terminal device determines its corresponding precoding mode according to the indication of the network device, and according to the pre The encoding method demodulates the data.
  • the terminal device in the non-linear precoding mode, the terminal device further needs to determine a power adjustment mode according to an indication of the network device (which may be an implicit indication or an explicit indication), and demodulate according to the determined precoding mode and power adjustment mode. data.
  • the network device and the terminal device first need to determine the size of the resource unit, and then the network device needs to obtain multiple channel correlations corresponding to multiple terminal devices in each resource unit in each resource unit, and according to each resource unit.
  • the plurality of channel correlation values determine a precoding manner corresponding to the terminal device that communicates on each resource unit, and determine a power adjustment mode based on a precoding method corresponding to the terminal device that communicates on each resource unit, and the network device needs to indicate each terminal.
  • the precoding mode and power adjustment mode corresponding to each resource unit of the device on its scheduling bandwidth.
  • the network device transmits data on each resource unit based on a precoding method and a power adjustment manner corresponding to the terminal device communicating on each resource unit.
  • each terminal device determines a precoding mode and a power adjustment mode corresponding to each resource unit in the scheduling bandwidth according to the indication of the network device, and according to the precoding mode and power corresponding to each resource unit in the scheduling bandwidth.
  • the adjustment method demodulates the data.
  • the network device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity, which avoids the disadvantage that the terminal device determines a precoding mode on the full bandwidth in the prior art. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit by using the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution sequence, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be applied to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence or implicitly indicates the precoding mode and/or power adjustment mode corresponding to each terminal device by using the phase difference between the PTRS sequences on different symbols.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto, and in practical applications, the phase difference by the sequence can also be used to indicate other information. Specifically, if the indicated information is relatively small, for example, 1 bit or 2 bits, the other information may be indicated by the same method as before; if the indicated information is greater than 2 bits, multiple consecutive PTRS symbol phase differences may be used.
  • each group contains 2 or more adjacent RS-signed symbols, where RS can be DMRS and PTRS, or only PTRS, and the phase difference between PTRS sequences on each group of PTRS symbols can be represented. 1 to 2 bits of information.
  • FIG. 1 to FIG. 4 are only for facilitating the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to the specific numerical values or specific scenarios illustrated.
  • a person skilled in the art will be able to make various modifications and changes in the embodiments according to the examples of FIG. 1 to FIG. 4, and such modifications or variations are also within the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution sequence, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be applied to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communications apparatus according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 500 may include:
  • Processing unit 510 and transceiver unit 520 are identical to processing unit 510 and transceiver unit 520.
  • the processing unit is configured to determine a plurality of channel correlation values of the plurality of terminal devices on the first resource unit, where the multiple terminal devices include devices that use the first resource unit to communicate, Each of the plurality of channel correlation values represents a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to send data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit in a first precoding manner corresponding to the first terminal device.
  • the communication device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity.
  • the precoding mode corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the terminal device in the prior art is determined to determine a full bandwidth.
  • the shortcomings of the precoding method. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit by using the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine a size of the first resource unit
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send the first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a size of the first resource unit.
  • processing unit is specifically configured to:
  • One of the preset values of the plurality of resource unit sizes is selected as the size of the first resource unit.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to: according to at least one of a degree of fluctuation of channel correlation between the terminal devices, a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a size of a subcarrier interval in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, One of the preset values of the plurality of resource unit sizes is selected as the size of the first resource unit.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine a size of the first resource unit according to a preset parameter, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
  • the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device, where the second Each bit in the indication information is used to indicate a precoding manner corresponding to one resource unit.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send, by using the first resource unit, a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence, where a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate the a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates with the first resource unit, and/or a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence where a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate the a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates with the first resource unit, and/or a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send a PTRS sequence by using multiple symbols in the first resource unit, where the multiple symbols include a first symbol set and a second symbol set, the first symbol set And a phase difference between the phase difference of the PTRS sequence and the PTRS sequence on the second symbol set is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit, and/or And a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the precoding mode when the first terminal device communicates by using the first resource unit is a non-linear precoding mode
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine, by using the first resource unit, the first The power adjustment mode when the terminal device sends data
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send third indication information to the first terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit. Power adjustment method.
  • the third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the third indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device, where the third Each bit in the indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment mode corresponding to one resource unit.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to send fourth indication information to the first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the first terminal device, where the The MCS is configured to indicate a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the communication device provided by the present application is a process performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiment of FIG. 3, and the functions of each unit/module in the communication device can be referred to the description above, and details are not described herein again.
  • the precoding method corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit is determined by the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, and the precoding manner corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different.
  • the shortcomings of the prior art terminal device determining a precoding mode over the entire bandwidth are avoided, and the system performance can be improved.
  • the communication device described in FIG. 5 may be a network device or a chip or an integrated circuit installed in the network device.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application, and may be, for example, a schematic structural diagram of a base station. As shown in FIG. 6, the network device 600 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the network device 600 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 61 and one or more baseband units (BBUs) (also referred to as digital units, digital units, DUs). ) 62.
  • the RRU 61 may be referred to as a transceiver unit 61, corresponding to the transceiver unit 520 of FIG. 5.
  • the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 611.
  • the RRU 61 portion is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for transmitting precoding matrix information to a terminal device.
  • the BBU 62 part is mainly used for performing baseband processing, controlling a base station, and the like.
  • the RRU 61 and the BBU 62 may be physically disposed together or physically separated, that is, distributed base stations.
  • the BBU 62 is a control center of the base station, and may also be referred to as a processing unit 62. It may correspond to the processing unit 510 in FIG. 5, and is mainly used to perform baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spreading, and the like.
  • the BBU processing unit
  • the BBU can be used to control the base station to perform an operation procedure about the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the BBU 62 may be composed of one or more boards, and multiple boards may jointly support a single access standard radio access network (such as an LTE network), or may separately support different access technologies. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network).
  • the BBU 62 also includes a memory 621 and a processor 622.
  • the memory 621 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 622 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to perform an operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 621 and the processor 622 can serve one or more boards. That is, the memory and processor can be individually set on each board. It is also possible that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, the necessary circuits can be set on each board.
  • the network device 600 shown in FIG. 6 can implement various processes related to the network device in the method embodiment of FIG. 3.
  • the operations and/or functions of the various modules in the network device 600 are respectively implemented in order to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the detailed description is omitted here.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a communications apparatus according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 700 may include:
  • Processing unit 710 and transceiver unit 720 are identical to processing unit 710 and transceiver unit 720.
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive data sent by the network device by using the first resource unit;
  • the processing unit is configured to demodulate the data by using a first precoding manner corresponding to the communication device, where the first precoding mode is that the network device is in a first resource unit according to multiple terminal devices. Determining, by the plurality of channel correlation values, the plurality of terminal devices including devices communicating using the first resource unit, each channel correlation value of the plurality of channel correlation values representing the plurality of terminals The degree of interference between two terminal devices in the device.
  • the network device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity.
  • the precoding method corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the terminal device in the prior art is determined to determine a full bandwidth.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive first indication information that is sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a size of the first resource unit.
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine, according to a preset parameter, a size of the first resource unit, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device. Subcarrier spacing.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second indication information that is sent by the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
  • the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the communication device, where the second indication information Each bit in the bit is used to indicate the precoding mode corresponding to one resource unit.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence sent by the network device by using the first resource unit, and the phase of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence The difference is used to indicate a precoding manner when the communication device communicates using the first resource unit, and/or a power adjustment mode when the network device transmits data to the communication device by using the first resource unit.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive a PTRS sequence that is sent by the network device by using multiple symbols in the first resource unit, where the multiple symbols include a first symbol set and a second symbol set.
  • a phase difference between the phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set and the PTRS sequence on the second symbol set is used to indicate a precoding manner when the terminal device communicates using the first resource unit And/or a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the precoding mode when the communication device uses the first resource unit communication is a non-linear precoding mode
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive third indication information sent by the network device, where the The three indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the third indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, where the third indication information is Each bit in the bit is used to indicate the power adjustment mode corresponding to one resource unit.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to receive fourth indication information that is sent by the network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the terminal device, where the MCS is used to And indicating a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  • the communication device 700 provided by the present application corresponds to the process performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment of FIG. 3.
  • the function of each unit/module in the communication device can be referred to the description above, and details are not described herein again.
  • the precoding method corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit is determined by the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, and the precoding manner corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the method may be avoided.
  • the terminal device determines a precoding mode on the full bandwidth. Therefore, the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application uses the precoding method corresponding to the resource unit to demodulate data in different resource units, thereby improving system performance. .
  • the communication device described in FIG. 7 may be a terminal device or a chip or an integrated circuit installed in the terminal device.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application, which is convenient for understanding and illustration.
  • the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • Fig. 8 shows only the main components of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device 800 shown in FIG. 8 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input/output device.
  • the processor is mainly used for processing the communication protocol and the communication data, and controlling the entire terminal device, executing the software program, and processing the data of the software program, for example, for supporting the terminal device to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • Memory is primarily used to store software programs and data.
  • the control circuit is mainly used for converting baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing radio frequency signals.
  • the control circuit together with the antenna can also be called a transceiver, and is mainly used for transmitting and receiving RF signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are primarily used to receive user input data and output data to the user.
  • the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal, and then sends the radio frequency signal to the outside through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 8 shows only one memory and processor for ease of illustration. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, and the like.
  • the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit, and the baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and the communication data, and the central processing unit is mainly used to control and execute the entire terminal device.
  • the processor in FIG. 8 can integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor and the central processing unit can also be independent processors and interconnected by technologies such as a bus.
  • the terminal device may include a plurality of baseband processors to accommodate different network standards, and the terminal device may include a plurality of central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal devices may be connected through various buses.
  • the baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip.
  • the central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip.
  • the functions of processing the communication protocol and the communication data may be built in the processor, or may be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.
  • the antenna and the control circuit having the transceiving function can be regarded as the transceiving unit 81 of the terminal device 800, for example, for supporting the terminal device to perform the transceiving function performed by the terminal device in the method implementation in FIG.
  • the processor having the processing function is regarded as the processing unit 82 of the terminal device 800, which corresponds to the processing unit 710 in FIG.
  • the terminal device 800 includes a transceiving unit 81 and a processing unit 82.
  • the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, etc., and the transceiver unit corresponds to the transceiver unit 720 in FIG.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 81 can be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 81 is regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 81 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc.
  • the transmitting unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit or the like.
  • the processing unit 82 can be configured to execute the instructions stored in the memory to control the transceiver unit 81 to receive signals and/or transmit signals to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the function of the transceiver unit 81 can be implemented by a dedicated chip through a transceiver circuit or a transceiver.
  • the terminal device 800 shown in FIG. 8 can implement various processes related to the terminal device in the method embodiment of FIG. 3.
  • the operations and/or functions of the respective modules in the terminal device 800 are respectively implemented in order to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the detailed description is omitted here.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a processing apparatus, including a processor and an interface, and a processor, which is used to perform the communication in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the above processing device may be a chip.
  • the processing device may be a Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), may be an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or may be a System on Chip (SoC). It can be a Central Processor Unit (CPU), a Network Processor (NP), a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), or a Micro Controller (Micro Controller). Unit, MCU), can also be a Programmable Logic Device (PLD) or other integrated chip.
  • FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • SoC System on Chip
  • CPU Central Processor Unit
  • NP Network Processor
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • MCU Micro Controller
  • PLD Programmable Logic Device
  • each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in a form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and combines the hardware to complete the steps of the above method. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability.
  • each step of the foregoing method embodiment may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in a form of software.
  • the above processor may be a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated crucit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or the like. Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • the methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and combines the hardware to complete the steps of the above method.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read only memory (ROMM), an erasable programmable read only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), or an electrical Erase programmable EPROM (EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory can be a random access memory (RAM) that acts as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM).
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous DRAM
  • DDR SDRAM double data rate synchronous DRAM
  • ESDRAM enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • SLDRAM synchronously connected dynamic random access memory
  • DR RAM direct memory bus random access memory
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device and terminal device.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable medium having stored thereon a computer program, the method of implementing the communication in any of the foregoing method embodiments when the computer program is executed by a computer.
  • the embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, which is implemented by a computer to implement the method of communication in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center via wired (eg coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a high-density digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (eg, a solid state disk, SSD)) and so on.
  • a magnetic medium eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium eg, a high-density digital video disc (DVD)
  • DVD high-density digital video disc
  • SSD solid state disk
  • a component can be, but is not limited to being, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer.
  • an application running on a computing device and a computing device can be a component.
  • One or more components can reside within a process and/or execution thread, and the components can be located on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers.
  • these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a component may, for example, be based on signals having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between the local system, the distributed system, and/or the network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • data packets eg, data from two components interacting with another component between the local system, the distributed system, and/or the network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs).
  • programs When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (eg, a solid state disk (SSD)) or the like.
  • a magnetic medium eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape
  • an optical medium eg, a DVD
  • a semiconductor medium eg, a solid state disk (SSD)

Abstract

The present application provides a data transmission method, and a communication apparatus and system. The method comprises: a network device determines multiple channel correlation values of multiple terminal devices on a first resource unit, the multiple terminal devices comprising devices communicating by means of the first resource unit; each of the multiple channel correlation values indicating the interference degree between two terminal devices of the multiple terminal devices; the network device determines, according to the multiple channel correlation values, a pre-coding mode corresponding to each of the multiple terminal devices, a first terminal device corresponding to a first pre-coding mode; the first terminal device being any one of the multiple terminal devices; the network device uses the first pre-coding mode corresponding to the first terminal device to send data to the first terminal device by means of the first resource unit. According to embodiments of the present application, the system performance can be improved.

Description

数据传输的方法、通信装置及系统Data transmission method, communication device and system
本申请要求于2018年4月10日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201810315139.3、申请名称为“数据传输的方法、通信装置及系统”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese Patent Application filed on April 10, 2018, the Chinese National Intellectual Property Office, the application number is 201810315139.3, and the application name is "Data Transmission Method, Communication Device and System", the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference. In this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信领域,更具体地,特别涉及一种数据传输的方法、通信装置及系统。The present application relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a method, a communication device, and a system for data transmission.
背景技术Background technique
现有的长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统中,多入多出(multiple input multiple output,MIMO)是物理层的一项关键技术,主要是利用多个发射天线及多个接收天线来提升系统性能的一种方法。In the existing long term evolution (LTE) system, multiple input multiple output (MIMO) is a key technology of the physical layer, mainly using multiple transmit antennas and multiple receive antennas to enhance A method of system performance.
其中,预编码技术是MIMO的一个非常重要的步骤,在进行预编码之前,系统首先通过层映射将待发送的数据信息映射到不同的层上,以使得数据信息按照一定的方式分配到不同的层上,之后,再通过预编码技术把分配到层上的数据信息映射到物理天线上。预编码技术能够将在接收端难以实施的一些必要的信号处理过程转到发射端处进行,从而保证传输过程的信号性能。Among them, the precoding technology is a very important step of MIMO. Before performing precoding, the system first maps the data information to be sent to different layers through layer mapping, so that the data information is allocated to different ones in a certain way. At the layer, the data information assigned to the layer is mapped to the physical antenna by precoding techniques. The precoding technique can transfer some necessary signal processing procedures that are difficult to implement at the receiving end to the transmitting end to ensure the signal performance of the transmission process.
现有的预编码技术实际上是一种自适应技术,随着信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI)的变化,对数据信息进行预编码的结果也会相应地变化,这种根据CSI的变化而实时变化的数据信息预处理技术使得终端设备可以在变化的CSI中获得正确的目标数据信息,因此预编码是长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统MIMO中的一项十分关键的技术。The existing precoding technology is actually an adaptive technology. As channel state information (CSI) changes, the result of precoding the data information will change accordingly. This change according to CSI The real-time changing data information pre-processing technology enables the terminal device to obtain the correct target data information in the changed CSI. Therefore, pre-coding is a very critical technology in the long term evolution (LTE) system MIMO.
不同的预编码方式的性能和复杂度是互不相同的,典型的预编码方式可以分为线性预编码以及非线性预编码两类,每一类预编码方式有其适合的工作场景。The performance and complexity of different precoding methods are different from each other. Typical precoding methods can be divided into linear precoding and nonlinear precoding. Each type of precoding has its suitable working scenario.
在现有的LTE协议中,根据终端设备在全带宽的信道相关性确定终端设备在全带宽的预编码方式,在LTE中,由于系统带宽较小,因此终端设备间的信道相关性在全带宽上的变化较小,用全带宽的信道相关性即可准确确定各终端设备间的预编码方式。但是在第五代新空口(new radio,NR)技术中,系统带宽可以高达400M,且各终端设备所支持的最大带宽会有较大区别,此时终端设备间的信道相关性很难在系统带宽上保持一致,因此,此时仍然用全带宽的信道相关性确定终端设备的预编码方式,会导致预编码方式选择不准确,影响系统性能。In the existing LTE protocol, the terminal device determines the full-bandwidth precoding mode of the terminal device according to the channel correlation of the full bandwidth. In LTE, since the system bandwidth is small, the channel correlation between the terminal devices is at the full bandwidth. The change in the above is small, and the pre-coding method between each terminal device can be accurately determined by using the full-bandwidth channel correlation. However, in the fifth generation of new radio (NR) technology, the system bandwidth can be as high as 400M, and the maximum bandwidth supported by each terminal device will be greatly different. At this time, the channel correlation between terminal devices is difficult in the system. The bandwidth is consistent. Therefore, the pre-coding mode of the terminal device is determined by the channel correlation of the full bandwidth at this time, which may result in inaccurate selection of the precoding mode and affect system performance.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种数据传输的方法、通信装置及系统,能够提升系统性能。The present application provides a data transmission method, communication device and system, which can improve system performance.
第一方面,提供了一种数据传输的方法,该方法包括网络设备确定多个终端设备在第 一资源单位上的多个信道相关性值,其中,该多个终端设备包括使用该第一资源单位通信的设备,该多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示该多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度;该网络设备根据该多个信道相关性值,确定该多个终端设备中的每个终端设备对应的预编码方式,其中,第一终端设备对应第一预编码方式,该第一终端设备为该多个终端设备中的任意一个;该网络设备使用该第一终端设备对应的第一预编码方式通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据。In a first aspect, a method for data transmission is provided, the method comprising: determining, by a network device, a plurality of channel correlation values of a plurality of terminal devices on a first resource unit, wherein the plurality of terminal devices comprise using the first resource a unit communication device, each channel correlation value of the plurality of channel correlation values indicating a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices; the network device according to the plurality of channel correlation values, Determining a precoding mode corresponding to each of the plurality of terminal devices, where the first terminal device corresponds to a first precoding mode, and the first terminal device is any one of the plurality of terminal devices; the network device Transmitting data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit in a first precoding manner corresponding to the first terminal device.
本申请实施例中网络设备以资源单位为粒度根据终端设备在资源单位上的信道相关性值确定预编码方式,同一个终端设备在不同的资源单位上对应的预编码方式可能不同,避免了现有技术中终端设备在全带宽上确定一种预编码方式的缺点。因此,本申请实施例通过终端设备在不同资源单位上的信道相关性,确定终端设备在各个资源单位上对应的预编码方式,能够提升系统性能。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device uses the resource unit as the granularity to determine the precoding mode according to the channel correlation value of the terminal device on the resource unit, and the precoding method corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, which avoids the present In the prior art, the terminal device determines the disadvantage of a precoding method over the full bandwidth. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit by using the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
应理解,该多个终端设备包括使用该第一资源单位通信的设备,该多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示该多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度。It should be understood that the plurality of terminal devices include devices that communicate using the first resource unit, each channel correlation value of the plurality of channel correlation values indicating interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices degree.
也就是说,每一个信道相关性值表示每两个终端设备之间的干扰程度,在使用第一资源单位通信的多个终端设备为n个时,那么该n个终端设备对应的多个信道相关性值共包括
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000001
个。例如,n为3时,即该多个终端设备为3个终端设备(第1个终端设备至第3个终端设备),那么该多个信相关性值可以包括
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000002
(即3)个信道相关性值,即第1个终端设备与第2个终端设备对应的信道相关性值,第1个终端设备与第3个终端设备对应的相关性值,以及第2个终端设备与第3个终端设备对应的信道相关性值。
That is, each channel correlation value represents the degree of interference between each two terminal devices, and when there are n plurality of terminal devices communicating using the first resource unit, then the plurality of channels corresponding to the n terminal devices Correlation values include
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000001
One. For example, when n is 3, that is, the plurality of terminal devices are three terminal devices (the first terminal device to the third terminal device), the multiple correspondence value may include
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000002
(ie, 3) channel correlation values, that is, channel correlation values corresponding to the first terminal device and the second terminal device, correlation values corresponding to the first terminal device and the third terminal device, and the second value The channel correlation value corresponding to the third terminal device of the terminal device.
应理解,信道相关性的取值表示使用该第一资源粒度通信的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度,当信道相关性值越大表示两个终端设备之间的干扰程度越大,反之,当信道相关性值越小表示两个终端设备之间的干扰程度越小。It should be understood that the value of the channel correlation indicates the degree of interference between two terminal devices that communicate using the first resource granularity. When the channel correlation value is larger, the degree of interference between the two terminal devices is greater, and vice versa. The smaller the channel correlation value, the smaller the degree of interference between the two terminal devices.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,第一资源单位的大小为预设的,即该第一资源单位的大小为系统默认的。这种情况下,网络设备和终端设备无需确定该第一资源单位的大小,网络设备和终端设备预先知道该第一资源单位的大小。网络设备可以直接按照该默认的第一资源单位大小使用本申请实施例方法确定预编码方式。相应地,终端设备可以直接按照该默认的第一资源单位大小使用本申请实施例方法解调接收到的数据。With reference to the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the size of the first resource unit is preset, that is, the size of the first resource unit is a system default. In this case, the network device and the terminal device do not need to determine the size of the first resource unit, and the network device and the terminal device know the size of the first resource unit in advance. The network device may directly determine the precoding mode by using the method in the embodiment of the present application according to the default first resource unit size. Correspondingly, the terminal device can directly demodulate the received data by using the method of the embodiment of the present application according to the default first resource unit size.
由于资源单位的大小为预设的,因此,本申请实施例中网络设备和终端设备无需确认该资源单位的大小,网络设备也无需向终端设备发送信令指示该资源单位的大小,因此,本申请实施例能够节省资源,减小信令开销。Because the size of the resource unit is preset, the network device and the terminal device do not need to confirm the size of the resource unit in the embodiment of the present application, and the network device does not need to send signaling to the terminal device to indicate the size of the resource unit. Applying an embodiment can save resources and reduce signaling overhead.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
该网络设备确定该第一资源单位的大小;The network device determines a size of the first resource unit;
该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一资源单位的大小。The network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the size of the first resource unit.
换句话说,第一资源单位的大小为网络设备确定的。这种情况下,网络设备首先要确定该第一资源单位的大小,然后需要指示终端设备该资源单位的大小。In other words, the size of the first resource unit is determined by the network device. In this case, the network device first determines the size of the first resource unit, and then needs to indicate the size of the resource unit of the terminal device.
应理解,本申请实施例中,该第一指示信息可以为高层信令如无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令,也可以是媒体接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层信令,还可以是下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI),或者广播信息等,本申请 实施例并不限于此。It should be understood that, in the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information may be high layer signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling, or may be medium access control (MAC) layer signaling. The embodiment may not be limited to the downlink control information (DCI), or the broadcast information.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该网络设备确定该第一资源单位的大小,包括:With reference to the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the determining, by the network device, the size of the first resource unit includes:
该网络设备根据每两个终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性的波动程度确定该第一资源单位的大小。The network device determines the size of the first resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of the channel correlation of each two terminal devices over the full bandwidth.
例如,两个终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性变化越慢,则资源单位越大,两个终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性变化越快,则资源单位越小。For example, the slower the channel correlation change of the two terminal devices on the full bandwidth, the larger the resource unit, and the faster the channel correlation of the two terminal devices on the full bandwidth changes, the smaller the resource unit.
由于资源单位的大小直接关系着非线性预编码的性能,本申请实施例采用最直观的方法根据终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性的波动程度确定资源单位的大小,因此,本申请实施例能够根据信道状态灵活的确定合适的资源单位的大小。The size of the resource unit is directly related to the performance of the non-linear pre-coding. The embodiment of the present application determines the size of the resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of the channel correlation of the terminal device on the full bandwidth by using the most intuitive method. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the size of the resource unit. The size of the appropriate resource unit can be determined flexibly according to the channel state.
或者,该网络设备确定该第一资源单位的大小,包括:Alternatively, the network device determines the size of the first resource unit, including:
该网络设备根据该多个终端设备的调度带宽的大小确定该第一资源单位的大小。The network device determines the size of the first resource unit according to the size of the scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices.
例如,终端设备的调度带宽越大,资源单位所占用的绝对带宽(单位为MHz)或所包含的RB数越大,终端设备的调度带宽越小,资源单位所占用的绝对带宽(单位为MHz)或所包含的RB数越小。For example, the larger the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, the larger the absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit or the larger the number of RBs included, the smaller the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and the absolute bandwidth occupied by the resource unit (in MHz). ) or the smaller the number of RBs included.
或者,该网络设备确定该第一资源单位的大小,包括:Alternatively, the network device determines the size of the first resource unit, including:
该网络设备根据该多个终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔的大小确定该第一资源单位的大小,Determining, by the network device, a size of the first resource unit according to a size of a subcarrier interval in a scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices, where
例如,终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔越大,资源单位包含的RB数越少;子载波间隔越小,资源单位所包含的RB数越多;或终端设备的调度带宽中子载波间隔越大,资源单位所占用的绝对带宽(单位为MHz)越大,终端设备的子载波间隔越小,资源单位所占用的绝对带宽(单位为MHz)越小。可选的,网络设备也可以是根据预设的多个子载波间隔与多个资源单位大小的一一对应关系,确定当前子载波对应的一个资源单位大小。For example, the larger the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, the smaller the number of RBs included in the resource unit; the smaller the subcarrier spacing, the more RBs the resource unit contains; or the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device. The larger the absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit, the smaller the subcarrier spacing of the terminal device, and the smaller the absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit. Optionally, the network device may determine a resource unit size corresponding to the current subcarrier according to a one-to-one correspondence between the preset multiple subcarrier spacings and the multiple resource unit sizes.
本申请实施例中网络设备可以根据子载波间隔的大小能够灵活的确定出合适的资源单位的大小。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device can flexibly determine the size of the appropriate resource unit according to the size of the subcarrier spacing.
或者,该网络设备确定该第一资源单位的大小,包括:Alternatively, the network device determines the size of the first resource unit, including:
该网络设备从预设的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为该第一资源单位的大小。The network device selects one of the preset values of the plurality of resource unit sizes as the size of the first resource unit.
本申请实施例,通过规定资源单位大小的集合,直接从该集合中选取资源单位的大小,能够降低实现的复杂低,减少信令开销。In the embodiment of the present application, by specifying a set of resource unit sizes, the size of the resource unit is directly selected from the set, which can reduce the complexity of the implementation and reduce the signaling overhead.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该网络设备从预设的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为该第一资源单位的大小,包括:With reference to the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the network device selects one of the values of the plurality of resource unit sizes as the size of the first resource unit, including:
该网络设备根据该终端设备间信道相关性的波动程度、该多个终端设备的调度带宽的大小和该多个终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔的大小中的至少一种,从预设的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为该第一资源单位的大小。The network device is preset from at least one of a degree of fluctuation of channel correlation between the terminal devices, a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the plurality of terminal devices, and a size of a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the plurality of terminal devices. One of the multiple resource unit size values is selected as the size of the first resource unit.
需要说明的是,由于信道的状态是实时变化的,因此该资源单位的大小的划分也需要根据信道的状态变化进行更新。It should be noted that since the state of the channel changes in real time, the division of the size of the resource unit also needs to be updated according to the state change of the channel.
应理解,本申请实施例中在更新资源单位大小后,网络设备需要重新发送第一指示信息,以指示该最新的资源单位大小,并按照更新后的资源单位大小确定预编码方式。It should be understood that, after updating the resource unit size in the embodiment of the present application, the network device needs to resend the first indication information to indicate the latest resource unit size, and determine the precoding manner according to the updated resource unit size.
应注意,在当前数据传结束后,在后续传输下行数据时,当资源单位大小没有变化时,网络设备可以不用发送该第一指示信息,终端设备可以按照上次的数据传输时网络设备的指示确定当前数据传输对应的资源单位的大小。It should be noted that, after the current data transmission ends, when the downlink data is subsequently transmitted, when the resource unit size does not change, the network device may not need to send the first indication information, and the terminal device may follow the indication of the network device during the last data transmission. Determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current data transmission.
当然,在每次数据传输时,不管资源单位的大小是否有变化,网络设备也可以均发送第一指示信息以指示资源单位的大小,本申请实施例并不限于此。Of course, in the case of the data transmission, the network device may also send the first indication information to indicate the size of the resource unit, regardless of whether the size of the resource unit changes. The embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
可选地,本申请实施例中可以周期的更新资源单位的大小。Optionally, the size of the resource unit may be periodically updated in the embodiment of the present application.
例如,更新资源单位的大小的周期单位可以是微时隙(mini slot),可以是时隙,如周期为N个时隙,其中N的取值可以为正整数,如N=1,则表示每个时隙更新一次资源单位的大小。For example, the period unit of the size of the updated resource unit may be a mini slot, which may be a time slot, such as a period of N slots, where the value of N may be a positive integer, such as N=1, indicating The size of the resource unit is updated once per time slot.
再例如N=1、2、4、8或16(分别对应15kHz,30kHz,60kHz,120kHz和240kHz的子载波间隔)则表示每个子帧更新一次资源单位的大小。Further, for example, N=1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 (corresponding to 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz, and 240 kHz subcarrier spacing, respectively) indicates that the size of the resource unit is updated once per subframe.
再例如N=10、20、40、80或160(分别对应15kHz,30kHz,60kHz,120kHz和240kHz的子载波间隔)则表示每个系统帧更新一次资源单位的大小;周期单位还可以是子帧,如M个子帧,M=1则表示每个子帧更新一次资源单位的大小,M=10则表示每个帧更新一次资源单位的大小;周期单位还可以是绝对时间,如5ms,10ms,20ms,40ms,80ms,100ms,200ms,400ms,800ms,1600ms,…等,本申请实施例并不限于此。For example, N=10, 20, 40, 80 or 160 (corresponding to 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz and 240 kHz subcarrier spacing respectively) means that the size of the resource unit is updated once per system frame; the period unit may also be a subframe For example, M subframes, M=1 means that each subframe updates the size of the resource unit, and M=10 means that the size of the resource unit is updated once per frame; the period unit can also be an absolute time, such as 5ms, 10ms, 20ms. The embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto, 40 ms, 80 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 400 ms, 800 ms, 1600 ms, ... and the like.
因此,本申请实施例通过周期性的更新资源单位大小,能够及时的确定与当前信道状态对应的资源单位的大小,进而可以根据更新后的资源单位的大小确定预编码方式,能够提升系统性能。Therefore, the embodiment of the present application can periodically determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current channel state by periodically updating the resource unit size, and further determine the precoding mode according to the size of the updated resource unit, thereby improving system performance.
可替代地,本申请实施例也可以非周期的更新资源单位的大小。Alternatively, the embodiment of the present application may also update the size of the resource unit aperiodically.
例如,资源单位的大小更新由网络设备或终端设备触发。For example, the size update of a resource unit is triggered by a network device or a terminal device.
因此,本申请实施例通过网络设备或终端设备更新信道状态信息灵活的更新资源单位大小,在信道状态变化较大的情况下,能够及时的确定与当前信道状态对应的资源单位的大小,进而可以根据更新后的资源单位的大小确定预编码方式,能够提升系统性能。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the network device or the terminal device updates the channel state information to update the resource unit size flexibly, and when the channel state changes greatly, the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current channel state can be determined in time, and then The precoding method is determined according to the size of the updated resource unit, which can improve system performance.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
该网络设备根据预设参数确定该第一资源单位的大小,该预设参数包括终端设备的调度带宽的大小、终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔。The network device determines a size of the first resource unit according to a preset parameter, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
也就是说,网络设备和终端设备按照相同的方式或规则确定该第一资源单位的大小。这种情况下,由于收发两端采用相同的方式或规则能够确定出相同的资源单位的大小。因此,网络设备不需要向终端设备发送额外的资源单位的大小的指示信息。That is, the network device and the terminal device determine the size of the first resource unit in the same manner or rule. In this case, the same resource unit size can be determined by the same method or rule at both ends of the transceiver. Therefore, the network device does not need to send an indication of the size of the additional resource unit to the terminal device.
本申请实施例中,由于网络设备和终端设备按照相同的规则确定该资源单位的大小,因此,网络设备无需额外通过信令指示终端设备该资源单位的大小,能够降低实现的复杂低,减少信令开销。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device and the terminal device determine the size of the resource unit according to the same rule. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the size of the resource unit of the terminal device by using signaling, which can reduce the complexity of the implementation and reduce the number of the information. Make the cost.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该第一预编码方式。The network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该第二指示信息为位图的形式,该第二指示信息的比特数与该第一终端设备的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,该第二指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的预编码方式。With reference to the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information and the resource unit in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device The numbers are equal, wherein each bit in the second indication information is used to indicate a precoding manner corresponding to one resource unit.
例如,本申请实施例中可以通过位图(bitmap)的形式显式指示每个资源单位的预编码方式,如资源单位数为4个时,则位图共有4位,如0110分别表示四个资源单位上的预编码方式为{线性预编码,非线性预编码,非线性预编码,线性预编码},或{非线性预编码,线性预编码,线性预编码,非线性预编码}。For example, in the embodiment of the present application, the precoding mode of each resource unit may be explicitly indicated in the form of a bitmap. If the number of resource units is four, the bitmap has four bits, for example, 0110 indicates four. The precoding method on the resource unit is {linear precoding, nonlinear precoding, nonlinear precoding, linear precoding}, or {nonlinear precoding, linear precoding, linear precoding, nonlinear precoding}.
本申请实施例通过显式的方式指示预编码方式,因此,终端设备可以根据该第二指示信息直接确定各个资源单位对应的预编码方式,无需额外的计算过程,能够降低实现复杂度。The embodiment of the present application indicates the precoding mode in an explicit manner. Therefore, the terminal device can directly determine the precoding mode corresponding to each resource unit according to the second indication information, and does not need an additional calculation process, thereby reducing implementation complexity.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
该网络设备通过该第一资源单位发送解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列,该DMRS序列和该PTRS序列的相位差用于指示该第一终端设备使用该第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式,和/或,该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends, by using the first resource unit, a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence, where a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate that the first terminal device uses the first resource unit to communicate The precoding mode, and/or the power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
该网络设备通过该第一资源单位中的多个符号发送PTRS序列,其中该多个符号包括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,该第一符号集合上该PTRS序列的相位差与该第二符号集合上的该PTRS序列的相位差用于指示该第一终端设备使用该第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式;和/或,该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends a PTRS sequence by using a plurality of symbols in the first resource unit, where the plurality of symbols includes a first symbol set and a second symbol set, a phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set and the second a phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the set of symbols is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit; and/or, the network device sends the first terminal device to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit The power adjustment method when sending data.
本申请实施例通过参考信号序列的相位差,隐式的指示预编码方式和/或功率调整方式,因此,网络设备无需额外通过信令指示该预编码方式和/或功率调整方式,能够节省信令开销。The embodiment of the present application implicitly indicates the precoding mode and/or the power adjustment mode by referring to the phase difference of the signal sequence. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the precoding mode and/or the power adjustment mode by signaling, thereby saving the letter. Make the cost.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该第一终端设备使用该第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式为非线性预编码方式,该方法还包括:With reference to the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the precoding mode when the first terminal device uses the first resource unit to communicate is a non-linear precoding mode, where the method further includes:
该网络设备确定通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式;Determining, by the network device, a power adjustment manner when the first resource unit sends data to the first terminal device;
该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该第三指示信息为位图的形式,该第三指示信息的比特数与该第一终端设备的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,该第三指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的功率调整方式。With reference to the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the third indication information and the resource unit in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device The numbers are equal, wherein each bit in the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment manner corresponding to one resource unit.
例如,本申请实施例中可以通过位图(bitmap)的形式指示每个资源单位的功率调整方式,如资源单位数为4个且四个资源单位上,则位图共有4位,如当四个资源单位都是非线性预编码时,0110分别表示四个资源单位上的预编码方式为{求模,功率回退,功率回退,求模},或{功率回退,求模,求模,功率回退};若终端设备在其中某些资源单位上的预编码方式是线性预编码,则位图所指示的功率调整方式无效。For example, in the embodiment of the present application, the power adjustment mode of each resource unit may be indicated in the form of a bitmap. For example, if the number of resource units is 4 and four resource units, the bitmap has 4 bits, such as four. When the resource units are all nonlinear precoding, 0110 indicates that the precoding methods on the four resource units are {modulo, power back, power back, modulo}, or {power back, modulo, modulo , power back}; if the precoding mode of the terminal equipment on some of the resource units is linear precoding, the power adjustment mode indicated by the bitmap is invalid.
本申请实施例通过显式的方式指示功率调整方式,因此,终端设备可以根据该第二指示信息直接确定各个资源单位对应的功率调整方式,无需额外的计算过程,能够降低实现复杂度。In the embodiment of the present application, the power adjustment mode is indicated in an explicit manner. Therefore, the terminal device can directly determine the power adjustment mode corresponding to each resource unit according to the second indication information, and the implementation complexity can be reduced without an additional calculation process.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:In conjunction with the first aspect, in an implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes:
该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第一终 端设备对应的调制编码方式MCS,其中,该MCS用于指示该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends a fourth indication information to the first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the first terminal device, where the MCS is used to indicate that the network device passes the first resource. The power adjustment mode when the unit transmits data to the first terminal device.
本申请实施例通过MCS隐式的指示功率调整方式,因此,网络设备无需额外通过信令指示该功率调整方式,能够节省信令开销。In the embodiment of the present application, the MCS implicitly indicates the power adjustment mode. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the power adjustment mode by signaling, which can save signaling overhead.
第二方面,提供了一种数据传输的方法,该方法包括:终端设备接收网络设备通过该第一资源单位发送的数据;该终端设备使用该终端设备对应的第一预编码方式解调该数据,其中,该第一预编码方式为该网络设备根据多个终端设备在第一资源单位上的多个信道相关性值确定的,该多个终端设备包括使用该第一资源单位通信的设备,该多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示该多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度。In a second aspect, a method for data transmission is provided, the method includes: receiving, by a terminal device, data sent by a network device by using the first resource unit; the terminal device demodulating the data by using a first precoding manner corresponding to the terminal device The first precoding mode is determined by the network device according to a plurality of channel correlation values of the plurality of terminal devices on the first resource unit, where the plurality of terminal devices include devices that use the first resource unit to communicate, Each of the plurality of channel correlation values represents a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices.
本申请实施例中网络设备以资源单位为粒度确定预编码方式,同一个终端设备在不同的资源单位上对应的预编码方式可能不同,避免了现有技术中终端设备在全带宽上确定一种预编码方式的缺点。因此,本申请实施例终端设备在不同资源单位上使用该资源单位对应的预编码方式解调数据,能够提升系统性能。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity. The precoding method corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the terminal device in the prior art is determined to determine a full bandwidth. The shortcomings of the precoding method. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device demodulates data in a precoding manner corresponding to the resource unit on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
应理解,第二方面描述的终端设备侧的方法与第一方面描述网络设备的方法相对应,终端设备侧的方法可以参考网络设备侧的描述,避免重复,此处适当省略详细描述。It should be understood that the method on the terminal device side described in the second aspect corresponds to the method for describing the network device in the first aspect, and the method on the terminal device side may refer to the description on the network device side to avoid repetition, and the detailed description is omitted here as appropriate.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in an implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
该终端设备接收该网络设备发送的第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一资源单位的大小。The terminal device receives the first indication information sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the size of the first resource unit.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in an implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
该终端设备根据预设参数确定该第一资源单位的大小,该预设参数包括该终端设备的调度带宽的大小、该终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔。The terminal device determines a size of the first resource unit according to a preset parameter, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in an implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
该终端设备接收该网络设备发送的第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该第一预编码方式。The terminal device receives the second indication information sent by the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的一种实现方式中,该第二指示信息为位图的形式,该第二指示信息的比特数与该终端设备的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,该第二指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的预编码方式。With reference to the second aspect, in an implementation manner of the second aspect, the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device. And wherein each bit in the second indication information is used to indicate a precoding manner corresponding to one resource unit.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in an implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
该终端设备接收该网络设备通过该第一资源单位发送的解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列,该DMRS序列和该PTRS序列的相位差用于指示该终端设备使用该第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式,和/或,该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。Receiving, by the terminal device, a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence sent by the network device by using the first resource unit, where a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate that the terminal device uses the first resource The precoding method in unit communication, and/or the power adjustment mode when the network device transmits data to the terminal device through the first resource unit.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in an implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
该终端设备接收该网络设备通过该第一资源单位中的多个符号发送的PTRS序列,其中该多个符号包括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,该第一符号集合上该PTRS序列的相位差与该第二符号集合上的该PTRS序列的相位差用于指示该终端设备使用该第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式,和/或,该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The terminal device receives a PTRS sequence that is sent by the network device by using multiple symbols in the first resource unit, where the multiple symbols include a first symbol set and a second symbol set, and the phase of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set a phase difference between the difference and the PTRS sequence on the second set of symbols is used to indicate a precoding manner when the terminal device communicates using the first resource unit, and/or the network device sends the terminal to the terminal by using the first resource unit The power adjustment method when the device sends data.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的一种实现方式中,该终端设备使用该第一资源单位通信 时的预编码方式为非线性预编码方式,该方法还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in an implementation manner of the second aspect, the precoding mode when the terminal device uses the first resource unit to communicate is a non-linear precoding mode, where the method further includes:
该终端设备接收该网络设备发送的第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The terminal device receives the third indication information that is sent by the network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的一种实现方式中,In conjunction with the second aspect, in an implementation of the second aspect,
该第三指示信息为位图的形式,该第三指示信息的比特数与该终端设备的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,该第三指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的功率调整方式。The third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, and the number of bits of the third indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, where each bit in the third indication information is used to indicate The power adjustment method corresponding to a resource unit.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的一种实现方式中,该方法还包括:With reference to the second aspect, in an implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes:
该终端设备接收该网络设备发送的第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该终端设备对应的调制编码方式MCS,其中,该MCS用于指示该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The terminal device receives the fourth indication information that is sent by the network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the terminal device, where the MCS is used to indicate that the network device uses the first resource unit to The power adjustment method when the terminal device sends data.
第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面任一种可能实现方式中的方法的各个模块或单元。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising various modules or units for performing the method of the first aspect or any of the possible implementations of the first aspect.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为网络设备。In one implementation, the communication device is a network device.
第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,所述终端设备包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面任一种可能实现方式中方法的各个模块或单元。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided, the terminal device comprising various modules or units for performing the method of any of the possible implementations of the second aspect or the second aspect.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。In one implementation, the communication device is a terminal device.
第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得该网络设备执行第一方面及其可能实现方式中的方法。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory. The processor is for controlling transceiver transceiver signals for storing a computer program for calling and running the computer program from memory such that the network device performs the method of the first aspect and its possible implementations.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为网络设备。In one implementation, the communication device is a network device.
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括收发器、处理器和存储器。该处理器用于控制收发器收发信号,该存储器用于存储计算机程序,该处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行该计算机程序,使得该终端设备执行第二方面及其可能实现方式中的方法。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, including a transceiver, a processor, and a memory. The processor is for controlling transceiver transceiver signals for storing a computer program for calling and running the computer program from memory such that the terminal device performs the method of the second aspect and its possible implementations.
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为终端设备。In one implementation, the communication device is a terminal device.
第七方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,其上存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。According to a seventh aspect, there is provided a computer readable medium having stored thereon a computer program, which when executed by a computer, implements the method of any of the possible implementations of the first aspect or the first aspect.
第八方面,提供了一种计算机可读介质,其上存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。According to an eighth aspect, there is provided a computer readable medium having stored thereon a computer program, which when executed by a computer, implements the method of any of the possible implementations of the second aspect or the second aspect.
第九方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现第一方面或第一方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided, the computer program product being executed by a computer to implement the method of any of the first aspect or the first aspect of the first aspect.
第十方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现第二方面或第二方面的任一种可能的实现方式中的方法。According to a tenth aspect, there is provided a computer program product, which when executed by a computer, implements the method of any of the possible implementations of the second aspect or the second aspect.
第十一方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口;In an eleventh aspect, a processing apparatus is provided, including a processor and an interface;
该处理器,用于作为上述第一方面、第二方面、第一方面或第二方面的任一可能的实现方式中的方法的执行主体来执行这些方法,其中相关的数据交互过程(例如进行或者接收数据传输)是通过上述接口来完成的。在具体实现过程中,上述接口可以进一步通过收发器来完成上述数据交互过程。The processor, for performing the method as an execution body of the method in any of the first aspect, the second aspect, the first aspect, or the second aspect, wherein the related data interaction process (for example, Or receive data transmission) is done through the above interface. In the specific implementation process, the foregoing interface may further complete the data interaction process by using a transceiver.
应理解,上述十一方面中的处理装置可以是一个芯片,该处理器可以通过硬件来实现 也可以通过软件来实现,当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储器可以集成在处理器中,可以位于该处理器之外,独立存在。It should be understood that the processing device in the eleventh aspect may be a chip, and the processor may be implemented by using hardware or by software. When implemented by hardware, the processor may be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, or the like; When implemented by software, the processor can be a general purpose processor implemented by reading software code stored in a memory, which can be integrated in the processor and can exist independently of the processor.
第十二方面,提供了一种系统,包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。According to a twelfth aspect, there is provided a system comprising the aforementioned network device and terminal device.
附图说明DRAWINGS
图1是本申请实施例可应用的通信系统的场景示意图。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application.
图2是本申请实施例中数据处理过程示意图。2 is a schematic diagram of a data processing process in an embodiment of the present application.
图3是本申请一个实施例的通信方法流程图。FIG. 3 is a flow chart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present application.
图4是根据本申请一个实施例的星座图示意图。4 is a schematic diagram of a constellation diagram in accordance with one embodiment of the present application.
图5是根据本申请一个实施例的通信装置示意图。FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a communication device in accordance with an embodiment of the present application.
图6是根据本申请另一实施例的通信装置示意图。FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present application.
图7是根据本申请一个实施例的网络设备示意图。FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
图8是根据本申请一个实施例的终端设备示意图。FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solutions in the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
本申请实施例可应用于各种通信系统,因此,下面的描述不限制于特定通信系统。例如,本申请实施例可以应用于长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统、时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)、无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)、无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)以及下一代通信系统,即第五代(5th generation,5G)通信系统,例如,新空口(new radio,NR)系统。The embodiments of the present application are applicable to various communication systems, and therefore, the following description is not limited to a specific communication system. For example, the embodiment of the present application can be applied to a long term evolution (LTE) system, a frequency division duplex (FDD) system, a time division duplex (TDD), a wireless local area network (wireless local area). Networks, WLAN), wireless fidelity (WiFi), and next-generation communication systems, ie, 5th generation (5G) communication systems, such as the new radio (NR) system.
本申请实施例中,网络设备可以是5G网络中的网络设备,例如,NR系统中传输点(transmission and reception point,TRP或transmission point TP)、NR系统中的基站(gNB)、NR系统中的射频单元,如远端射频单元、5G系统中的基站的一个或一组(包括多个天线面板)天线面板等。还可以是可穿戴设备或车载设备等。不同的网络设备可以位于同一个小区,也可以位于不同的小区,具体的在此不做限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device may be a network device in a 5G network, for example, a transmission and reception point (TRP or transmission point TP) in the NR system, a base station (gNB) in the NR system, and an NR system. A radio frequency unit, such as a remote radio unit, one or a group of base stations (including multiple antenna panels), and the like in a 5G system. It can also be a wearable device or an in-vehicle device. Different network devices may be located in the same cell or in different cells, and are not limited herein.
在一些部署中,gNB可以包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)。gNB还可以包括射频单元(radio unit,RU)。CU实现gNB的部分功能,DU实现gNB的部分功能,比如,CU实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能,DU实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。由于RRC层的信息最终会变成PHY层的信息,或者,由PHY层的信息转变而来,因而,在这种架构下,高层信令,如RRC层信令或PHCP层信令,也可以认为是由DU发送的,或者,由DU+RU发送的。可以理解的是,网络设备可以为CU节点、或DU节点、或包括CU节点和DU节点的设备。此外,CU可以划分为接入网RAN中的网络设备,也可以将CU划分为核心网CN中的网络设备,在此不做限制。In some deployments, a gNB may include a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU). The gNB may also include a radio unit (RU). The CU implements some functions of the gNB, and the DU implements some functions of the gNB. For example, the CU implements radio resource control (RRC), the function of the packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) layer, and the DU implements the wireless chain. The functions of the radio link control (RLC), the media access control (MAC), and the physical (PHY) layer. Since the information of the RRC layer eventually becomes information of the PHY layer or is transformed by the information of the PHY layer, high-level signaling, such as RRC layer signaling or PHCP layer signaling, can also be used in this architecture. It is considered to be sent by the DU or sent by the DU+RU. It can be understood that the network device can be a CU node, or a DU node, or a device including a CU node and a DU node. In addition, the CU may be divided into network devices in the access network RAN, and the CU may be divided into network devices in the core network CN, which is not limited herein.
本申请实施例中,终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。接入终端可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、家用电器、可穿戴设备、无人机设备以及未来5G网络中的终端设备或者未来演进的公用陆地移动通信网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be referred to as a user equipment (UE), an access terminal, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a user terminal, and a terminal. , a wireless communication device, a user agent, or a user device. The access terminal may be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), with wireless communication. Functional handheld devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, household appliances, wearable devices, drone devices, and terminal devices in future 5G networks or future extended public land mobile communication networks (public The terminal device and the like in the land mobile network (PLMN) are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。By way of example and not limitation, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. A wearable device, which can also be called a wearable smart device, is a general term for applying wearable technology to intelligently design and wear wearable devices such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable devices are more than just a hardware device, but they also implement powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Generalized wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-size, non-reliable smartphones for full or partial functions, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and focus on only one type of application, and need to work with other devices such as smartphones. Use, such as various smart bracelets for smart signs monitoring, smart jewelry, etc.
图1是本申请实施例可应用的通信系统的场景示意图。如图1所示,该通信系统100包括网络设备102,网络设备102可包括多个天线组。每个天线组可以包括多个天线,例如,一个天线组可包括天线104和106,另一个天线组可包括天线106和110,附加组可包括天线112和114。图1中对于每个天线组示出了2个天线,然而可对于每个组使用更多或更少的天线。网络设备102可附加地包括发射机链和接收机链,本领域普通技术人员可以理解,它们均可包括与信号发送和接收相关的多个部件(例如处理器、调制器、复用器、解调器、解复用器或天线等)。FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a scenario of a communication system applicable to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1, the communication system 100 includes a network device 102, which may include multiple antenna groups. Each antenna group may include multiple antennas, for example, one antenna group may include antennas 104 and 106, another antenna group may include antennas 106 and 110, and an additional group may include antennas 112 and 114. Two antennas are shown in Figure 1 for each antenna group, although more or fewer antennas may be used for each group. Network device 102 may additionally include a transmitter chain and a receiver chain, as will be understood by those of ordinary skill in the art, which may include multiple components related to signal transmission and reception (eg, processor, modulator, multiplexer, solution) Tuner, demultiplexer or antenna, etc.).
网络设备102可以与多个终端设备(例如终端设备116和终端设备122)通信。然而,可以理解,网络设备102可以与类似于终端设备116或122的任意数目的终端设备通信。终端设备116和122可以是例如蜂窝电话、智能电话、便携式电脑、手持通信设备、手持计算设备、卫星无线电装置、全球定位系统、PDA和/或用于在无线通信系统100上通信的任意其它适合设备。 Network device 102 can communicate with a plurality of terminal devices, such as terminal device 116 and terminal device 122. However, it will be appreciated that network device 102 can communicate with any number of terminal devices similar to terminal device 116 or 122. Terminal devices 116 and 122 may be, for example, cellular telephones, smart phones, portable computers, handheld communication devices, handheld computing devices, satellite radios, global positioning systems, PDAs, and/or any other suitable for communicating over wireless communication system 100. device.
如图1所示,终端设备116与天线112和114通信,其中天线112和114通过前向链路116向终端设备116发送信息,并通过反向链路120从终端设备116接收信息。此外,终端设备122与天线104和106通信,其中天线104和106通过前向链路124向终端设备122发送信息,并通过反向链路126从终端设备122接收信息。As shown in FIG. 1, terminal device 116 is in communication with antennas 112 and 114, wherein antennas 112 and 114 transmit information to terminal device 116 over forward link 116 and receive information from terminal device 116 over reverse link 120. In addition, terminal device 122 is in communication with antennas 104 and 106, wherein antennas 104 and 106 transmit information to terminal device 122 over forward link 124 and receive information from terminal device 122 over reverse link 126.
例如,在频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)系统中,例如,前向链路116可利用与反向链路120所使用的不同频带,前向链路124可利用与反向链路126所使用的不同频带。For example, in a frequency division duplex (FDD) system, for example, the forward link 116 can utilize a different frequency band than that used by the reverse link 120, and the forward link 124 can utilize the reverse link. 126 different frequency bands used.
再例如,在时分双工(time division duplex,TDD)系统和全双工(full duplex)系统中,前向链路116和反向链路120可使用共同频带,前向链路124和反向链路126可使用共同频带。As another example, in a time division duplex (TDD) system and a full duplex system, the forward link 116 and the reverse link 120 can use a common frequency band, a forward link 124, and a reverse link. Link 126 can use a common frequency band.
被设计用于通信的每组天线和/或区域称为网络设备102的扇区。例如,可将天线组 设计为与网络设备102覆盖区域的扇区中的终端设备通信。在网络设备102通过前向链路116和124分别与终端设备116和122进行通信的过程中,网络设备102的发射天线可利用波束成形来改善前向链路116和124的信噪比。此外,与网络设备通过单个天线向它所有的终端设备发送信号的方式相比,在网络设备102利用波束成形向相关覆盖区域中随机分散的终端设备116和122发送信号时,相邻小区中的移动设备会受到较少的干扰。Each set of antennas and/or regions designed for communication is referred to as a sector of network device 102. For example, the antenna group can be designed to communicate with terminal devices in sectors of the network device 102 coverage area. In the process in which network device 102 communicates with terminal devices 116 and 122 via forward links 116 and 124, respectively, the transmit antennas of network device 102 may utilize beamforming to improve the signal to noise ratio of forward links 116 and 124. In addition, when the network device 102 uses beamforming to transmit signals to the randomly dispersed terminal devices 116 and 122 in the relevant coverage area, the network device 102 uses a single antenna to transmit signals to all of its terminal devices. Mobile devices are subject to less interference.
在给定时间,网络设备102、终端设备116或终端设备122可以是无线通信发送装置和/或无线通信接收装置。当发送数据时,无线通信发送装置可对数据进行编码以用于传输。具体地,无线通信发送装置可获取(例如生成、从其它通信装置接收、或在存储器中保存等)要通过信道发送至无线通信接收装置的一定数目的数据比特。这种数据比特可包含在数据的传输块(或多个传输块)中,传输块可被分段以产生多个码块。At a given time, network device 102, terminal device 116, or terminal device 122 may be a wireless communication transmitting device and/or a wireless communication receiving device. When transmitting data, the wireless communication transmitting device can encode the data for transmission. In particular, the wireless communication transmitting device may acquire (eg, generate, receive from other communication devices, or store in memory, etc.) a certain number of data bits to be transmitted over the channel to the wireless communication receiving device. Such data bits may be included in a transport block (or multiple transport blocks) of data that may be segmented to produce multiple code blocks.
此外,该通信系统100可以是公共陆地移动网络PLMN网络或者设备对设备(device to device,D2D)网络或者机器对机器(machine to machine,M2M)网络或者其他网络,图1仅为便于理解而示例的简化示意图,网络中还可以包括其他网络设备,图1中未予以画出。In addition, the communication system 100 may be a public land mobile network PLMN network or a device to device (D2D) network or a machine to machine (M2M) network or other network, and FIG. 1 is merely an example for convenience of understanding. A simplified schematic diagram of the network may also include other network devices, which are not shown in FIG.
图2示出了数据通过正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号发送之前发送端(例如网络设备)所进行的数据处理过程的主要步骤。如图2所示,来自上层(例如,媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层)的业务流经过信道编码之后的得到的码字经过加扰、调制、层映射后映射到一个或多层,然后经过预编码处理、资源单元映射,最后将调制后的符号通过天线端口发送出去。FIG. 2 shows the main steps of a data processing process performed by a transmitting end (for example, a network device) before data is transmitted by orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols. As shown in FIG. 2, the obtained codewords from the upper layer (for example, the media access control (MAC) layer) are subjected to channel coding, and the obtained codewords are mapped to one or more after scrambling, modulation, and layer mapping. The layer is then subjected to precoding processing, resource unit mapping, and finally the modulated symbol is transmitted through the antenna port.
相应地,接收端(例如终端设备)可以进行解调数据。具体的上述各个数据处理过程可以参见现有标准中的描述。Accordingly, the receiving end (e.g., the terminal device) can perform demodulation of data. The specific data processing procedures described above can be referred to the description in the existing standards.
MIMO技术的主要作用是提供空间分集和空间复用增益,MIMO利用多根发射天线将具有相同信息的信号通过不同的路径发射出去,同时在接收端可以获取同一个数据符号的多个独立衰落的信号,从而获得分集提高的接收可靠性,MIMO技术的空间分集可以用来对抗信道衰落。The main function of MIMO technology is to provide spatial diversity and spatial multiplexing gain. MIMO uses multiple transmit antennas to transmit signals with the same information through different paths, and at the receiving end can obtain multiple independent fading of the same data symbol. Signals, thereby achieving improved reception reliability for diversity, spatial diversity of MIMO techniques can be used to combat channel fading.
预编码技术不仅能够有效抑制MIMO系统中的多个用户干扰,而且能在大大简化接收端算法的同时显著提升系统容量。预编码通过利用已知的信道状态信息CSI,在发射端对发射信号进行预处理,使处理过后的发射信号能够适应信道环境,以消除用户之间的干扰,达到降低系统误码率,提高系统容量,降低发射功率等目的。The precoding technology can not only effectively suppress multiple user interferences in the MIMO system, but also significantly improve the system capacity while greatly simplifying the receiver algorithm. The precoding uses the known channel state information CSI to preprocess the transmitted signal at the transmitting end, so that the processed transmitted signal can adapt to the channel environment, thereby eliminating interference between users, reducing the system error rate and improving the system. Capacity, reduce transmit power, etc.
不同的预编码方式的性能和复杂度是互不相同的,典型的预编码方式可以分为线性预编码以及非线性预编码两类,每一类预编码方式有其适合的工作场景。下面对线性预编码和非线性预编码分别进行介绍。The performance and complexity of different precoding methods are different from each other. Typical precoding methods can be divided into linear precoding and nonlinear precoding. Each type of precoding has its suitable working scenario. Linear precoding and nonlinear precoding are introduced separately below.
线性预编码是对所获取的信道状态信息进行线性处理。典型的线性预编码算法可以包括迫零(zero forcing,ZF)预编码以及它的各种改进算法,最小均方误差(mimimum mean square error,MMSE)预编码,块对角化(block diagonalization,BD)预编码以及最优化信漏噪比(signal to leakage noise ratio,SLNR)预编码。线性预编码的优点是其操作复杂度低、实现简单、实用性强,但是受信道相关性影响较大,因为在信道矩阵H为病态时,接收端等效噪声会增大,从而影响解调及检测而带来系统性能的损失。Linear precoding is the linear processing of the acquired channel state information. A typical linear precoding algorithm may include zero forcing (ZF) precoding and its various improved algorithms, minimum mean square error (MMSE) precoding, block diagonalization (BD). Precoding and optimization of signal to leakage noise ratio (SLNR) precoding. The advantage of linear precoding is that it has low operation complexity, simple implementation and strong practicability, but it is greatly affected by channel correlation. Because the channel matrix H is ill, the equivalent noise at the receiving end will increase, which will affect the demodulation. And detection leads to loss of system performance.
非线性预编码是对信道矩阵进行非线性操作(如引入迭代、干扰消除、取模、功率回 退),典型的非线性预编码方式可以包括脏纸编码(dirty paper coding,DPC),模代数预编码(tomlinson harashima precoding,THP)和矢量扰动(vector perturbation,VP)预编码。非线性预编码的优点是性能优异,受信道相关性影响较小,缺点是复杂度高。Nonlinear precoding is a non-linear operation of the channel matrix (such as introducing iteration, interference cancellation, modulo, power back-off). Typical nonlinear precoding methods can include dirty paper coding (DPC), modular algebra Precoding (tomlinson harashima precoding, THP) and vector perturbation (VP) precoding. The advantage of nonlinear precoding is that it has excellent performance, is less affected by channel correlation, and has the disadvantage of high complexity.
由于线性预编码和非线性预编码方式的性能和复杂度均不同,网络设备需要根据不同的信道条件,权衡复杂度和性能等因素,确定对数据处理的预编码方式为线性预编码方式或非线性预编码方式。Since the performance and complexity of the linear precoding and nonlinear precoding methods are different, the network device needs to determine the precoding method for data processing as linear precoding mode or non according to different channel conditions, balancing complexity and performance. Linear precoding method.
在现有的LTE协议中,网络设备可以根据终端设备在全带宽的信道相关性确定终端设备在全带宽的预编码方式,在LTE中,由于系统带宽较小,因此终端设备间的信道相关性在全带宽上的变化较小,用全带宽的信道相关性即可准确确定各终端设备间的预编码方式。但是在第五代新空口技术中,系统带宽可以高达400M,且各终端设备所支持的最大带宽会有较大区别,此时终端设备间的信道相关性很难在系统带宽上保持一致,因此,此时仍然用全带宽的信道相关性确定终端设备的预编码方式,会导致预编码方式选择不准确,影响系统性能。In the existing LTE protocol, the network device can determine the precoding mode of the terminal device in the full bandwidth according to the channel correlation of the terminal device in full bandwidth. In LTE, the channel correlation between the terminal devices is small due to the small system bandwidth. The change in the full bandwidth is small, and the pre-coding mode between each terminal device can be accurately determined by using the full-bandwidth channel correlation. However, in the fifth generation of new air interface technology, the system bandwidth can be as high as 400M, and the maximum bandwidth supported by each terminal device is greatly different. At this time, the channel correlation between terminal devices is difficult to be consistent in the system bandwidth. At this time, the pre-coding mode of the terminal device is still determined by using the full-bandwidth channel correlation, which may result in inaccurate selection of the pre-coding mode and affect system performance.
鉴于上述问题,本申请实施例提出了一种确定预编码方式的方法。具体的,网络设备根据终端设备在资源单位上的信道相关性值确定各个终端设备在该资源单位上对应的预编码方式。本申请实施例中网络设备以资源单位为粒度确定预编码方式,同一个终端设备在不同的资源单位上对应的预编码方式可能不同,避免了现有技术中终端设备在全带宽上确定一种预编码方式的缺点。因此,本申请实施例通过终端设备在不同资源单位上的信道相关性,确定终端设备在各个资源单位上对应的预编码方式,能够提升系统性能。In view of the above problems, the embodiment of the present application proposes a method for determining a precoding method. Specifically, the network device determines, according to the channel correlation value of the terminal device on the resource unit, a precoding manner corresponding to each terminal device on the resource unit. In the embodiment of the present application, the network device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity. The precoding method corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the terminal device in the prior art is determined to determine a full bandwidth. The shortcomings of the precoding method. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit by using the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
应理解,本申请实施例中终端设备对应的预编码方式表示网络设备通过第一资源单位向终端设备发送数据时所采用的预编码方式。It should be understood that the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application indicates the precoding mode used by the network device to send data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
应理解,本文中的名词“预编码方式”也可以称为预编码方案、预编码模式、预编码类别或预编码类型等,本申请实施里并不限于此。It should be understood that the term "precoding mode" in this document may also be referred to as a precoding scheme, a precoding mode, a precoding class or a precoding type, etc., and the implementation of the present application is not limited thereto.
本文中的名词“功率调整方式”也可以称为功率调整方案、功率调整模式、功率调整类别或功率调整类型等,本申请实施里并不限于此。The term "power adjustment mode" in this document may also be referred to as a power adjustment scheme, a power adjustment mode, a power adjustment category, or a power adjustment type, etc., and the implementation of the present application is not limited thereto.
应理解,本申请实施例中“全带宽”可以表示系统带宽,或者系统可调度的总带宽,本申请实施例并不限于此。It should be understood that the “full bandwidth” in the embodiment of the present application may indicate the system bandwidth, or the total bandwidth that the system can schedule. The embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
以下,为了便于理解和说明,作为示例而非限定,以将本申请的通信的方法在通信系统中的执行过程和动作进行说明。Hereinafter, for ease of understanding and explanation, the execution process and actions of the communication method of the present application in the communication system will be described by way of example and not limitation.
图3是根据本申请一个实施例的通信的方法示意性流程图。如图3所示的方法从网络设备与终端设备交互的角度描述了本申请实施例的方法。具体地,如图3所示的方法包括:FIG. 3 is a schematic flow chart of a method of communication according to an embodiment of the present application. The method shown in FIG. 3 describes the method of the embodiment of the present application from the perspective of interaction between the network device and the terminal device. Specifically, the method shown in FIG. 3 includes:
310,网络设备确定多个终端设备在第一资源单位上的多个信道相关性值。310. The network device determines a plurality of channel correlation values of the plurality of terminal devices on the first resource unit.
其中,该多个终端设备包括使用该第一资源单位通信的设备,该多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示该多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度。The plurality of terminal devices include devices that communicate using the first resource unit, and each of the plurality of channel correlation values represents a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices .
也就是说,每一个信道相关性值表示每两个终端设备之间的干扰程度,在使用第一资源单位通信的多个终端设备为n个时,那么该n个终端设备对应的多个信道相关性值共包括
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000003
个。例如,n为3时,即该多个终端设备为3个终端设备(第1个终端设备至第3个终端设备),那么该多个信相关性值可以包括
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000004
(即3)个信道相关性值,即第1个终端设备与第2个终端设备对应的信道相关性值,第1个终端设备与第3个终端设备对应的相 关性值,以及第2个终端设备与第3个终端设备对应的信道相关性值。
That is, each channel correlation value represents the degree of interference between each two terminal devices, and when there are n plurality of terminal devices communicating using the first resource unit, then the plurality of channels corresponding to the n terminal devices Correlation values include
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000003
One. For example, when n is 3, that is, the plurality of terminal devices are three terminal devices (the first terminal device to the third terminal device), the multiple correspondence value may include
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000004
(ie, 3) channel correlation values, that is, channel correlation values corresponding to the first terminal device and the second terminal device, correlation values corresponding to the first terminal device and the third terminal device, and the second value The channel correlation value corresponding to the third terminal device of the terminal device.
应理解,信道相关性的取值表示使用该第一资源单位通信的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度,当信道相关性值越大表示两个终端设备之间的干扰程度越大,反之,当信道相关性值越小表示两个终端设备之间的干扰程度越小。It should be understood that the value of the channel correlation indicates the degree of interference between two terminal devices communicating using the first resource unit. When the channel correlation value is larger, the degree of interference between the two terminal devices is greater, and vice versa. The smaller the channel correlation value, the smaller the degree of interference between the two terminal devices.
作为示例而非限定,下面描述本申请实施例中使用第一资源单位通信的多个终端设备对应的信道相关性的一种解释:By way of example and not limitation, an explanation of the channel correlation corresponding to a plurality of terminal devices communicating using the first resource unit in the embodiment of the present application is described below:
假设每个终端设备的接收天线数均为1,网络设备和第k个终端设备间的信道表示为Hk,维度为1*Nt,其中Nt为网络设备的发射天线数。对信道Hk做奇异值(singular value decomposition,SVD)分解,得到第k个终端设备的主右奇异向量,即最大特征值对应的右奇异向量,该右奇异向量表示第k个终端设备的数据在空间中的传输方向。It is assumed that the number of receiving antennas of each terminal device is 1, and the channel between the network device and the kth terminal device is represented as Hk, and the dimension is 1*Nt, where Nt is the number of transmitting antennas of the network device. Performing a singular value decomposition (SVD) decomposition on the channel Hk to obtain a right-right singular vector of the kth terminal device, that is, a right singular vector corresponding to the largest eigenvalue, the right singular vector indicating that the data of the kth terminal device is The direction of transmission in space.
那么两个终端设备间的信道相关性则指:两个终端设备间的主右奇异向量内积的模值或该两个终端设备中的一个终端设备的主右奇异向量在另外一个终端设备的主右奇异向量上的投影长度,模值越小或投影长度越小,则信道相关性越低,否则信道相关性越高。Then the channel correlation between the two terminal devices refers to: the modulus of the main right singular vector inner product between the two terminal devices or the main right singular vector of one of the two terminal devices in another terminal device The projection length on the main right singular vector, the smaller the modulus value or the smaller the projection length, the lower the channel correlation, otherwise the channel correlation is higher.
由于各右奇异向量的长度相同,均为1,所以影响内积大小的因素为各终端设备的数据传输方向间的夹角,夹角越接近0°或180°,则内积的模值越大,信道相关性越大;夹角越接近90°或者270°,则内积的模值越小,信道相关性约小。Since the lengths of the right singular vectors are the same, both are 1, so the factor affecting the inner product size is the angle between the data transmission directions of the terminal devices. The closer the angle is to 0° or 180°, the more the modulus of the inner product is. Large, the channel correlation is larger; the closer the angle is to 90° or 270°, the smaller the modulus of the inner product is, and the channel correlation is about small.
本申请实施例中,资源单位可以表示一段带宽资源,例如,一个资源单位为系统带宽中的一段带宽资源,例如,一个资源单位为若干个资源块(resource block,RB)、或若干个资源块组(resource block group,RBG)、或一段绝对带宽资源(MHz),例如,5兆带宽、10兆带宽等等,本申请实施例并不限于此。换句话说,系统带宽中可以包括多个资源单位。比如,400M系统带宽中,资源单位可以划分为10M带宽、20M带宽、50M带宽等。也就是说,针对每一个资源单位,网络设备需要进行与第一资源单位同样的处理。In this embodiment, the resource unit may represent a bandwidth resource. For example, one resource unit is a bandwidth resource in the system bandwidth. For example, one resource unit is a plurality of resource blocks (RBs) or several resource blocks. A resource block group (RBG), or an absolute bandwidth resource (MHz), for example, a 5 megabit bandwidth, a 10 megabit bandwidth, etc., is not limited thereto. In other words, multiple resource units can be included in the system bandwidth. For example, in a 400M system bandwidth, resource units can be divided into 10M bandwidth, 20M bandwidth, and 50M bandwidth. That is to say, for each resource unit, the network device needs to perform the same processing as the first resource unit.
应理解,第一资源单位的取值可以小于或等于终端设备的最小调度带宽。可选地,任一终端设备的调度带宽可以为该第一资源单位的整数倍。It should be understood that the value of the first resource unit may be less than or equal to the minimum scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device. Optionally, the scheduling bandwidth of any terminal device may be an integer multiple of the first resource unit.
应理解,本文中,资源单位也可以称为子带、资源粒度或者资源集合等,本申请实施例并不限于此。It should be understood that, in this context, the resource unit may also be referred to as a sub-band, a resource granularity, or a resource set, and the like, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
在本申请实施例中,可以采用多种方式确定该第一资源单位的大小。下面将分别进行详细说明。In the embodiment of the present application, the size of the first resource unit may be determined in multiple manners. The details will be described separately below.
方式一:method one:
第一资源单位的大小为预设的,即该第一资源单位的大小为系统默认的。这种情况下,网络设备和终端设备预先知道该第一资源单位的大小,无需再确定该第一资源单位的大小。网络设备可以直接按照该默认的第一资源单位大小使用本申请实施例方法确定预编码方式。相应地,终端设备可以直接按照该默认的第一资源单位大小使用本申请实施例方法解调接收到的数据。The size of the first resource unit is preset, that is, the size of the first resource unit is the system default. In this case, the network device and the terminal device know the size of the first resource unit in advance, and it is not necessary to determine the size of the first resource unit. The network device may directly determine the precoding mode by using the method in the embodiment of the present application according to the default first resource unit size. Correspondingly, the terminal device can directly demodulate the received data by using the method of the embodiment of the present application according to the default first resource unit size.
由于资源单位的大小为预设的,因此,本申请实施例中网络设备和终端设备无需确认该资源单位的大小,网络设备也无需向终端设备发送信令指示该资源单位的大小,因此,本申请实施例能够节省资源,减小信令开销。Because the size of the resource unit is preset, the network device and the terminal device do not need to confirm the size of the resource unit in the embodiment of the present application, and the network device does not need to send signaling to the terminal device to indicate the size of the resource unit. Applying an embodiment can save resources and reduce signaling overhead.
方式二:Method 2:
第一资源单位的大小为网络设备确定的。这种情况下,网络设备首先要确定该第一资 源单位的大小,然后需要指示终端设备该资源单位的大小。The size of the first resource unit is determined by the network device. In this case, the network device first determines the size of the first resource unit, and then needs to indicate the size of the resource unit of the terminal device.
相应的,作为另一实施例,该方法还包括:Correspondingly, as another embodiment, the method further includes:
该网络设备确定该第一资源单位的大小;The network device determines a size of the first resource unit;
该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第一指示信息,该第一指示信息用于指示该第一资源单位的大小。The network device sends the first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate the size of the first resource unit.
相应地,终端设备接收该第一指示信息。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the first indication information.
应理解,本申请实施例中,该第一指示信息可以为高层信令如无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)信令,也可以是媒体接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层信令,还可以是下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI),或者广播信息等,本申请实施例并不限于此。It should be understood that, in the embodiment of the present application, the first indication information may be high layer signaling, such as radio resource control (RRC) signaling, or may be medium access control (MAC) layer signaling. The embodiment may not be limited to the downlink control information (DCI), or the broadcast information.
作为示例而非限定,下面介绍在方式二中,网络设备确定该第一资源单位的大小的具体可能的实现方式:As an example and not by way of limitation, in the second mode, the network device determines a specific possible implementation manner of the size of the first resource unit:
在一种可能得实现方式中,该网络设备根据每两个终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性的波动程度确定该第一资源单位的大小。In a possible implementation manner, the network device determines the size of the first resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of channel correlation of the total bandwidth of each two terminal devices.
具体而言,两个终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性变化越慢,则资源单位越大,两个终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性变化越快,则资源单位越小。Specifically, the slower the channel correlation change of the two terminal devices on the full bandwidth, the larger the resource unit, and the faster the channel correlation of the two terminal devices on the full bandwidth changes, the smaller the resource unit.
由于资源单位的大小直接关系着非线性预编码的性能,本申请实施例采用最直观的方法根据终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性的波动程度确定资源单位的大小,因此,本申请实施例能够根据信道状态灵活的确定合适的资源单位的大小。The size of the resource unit is directly related to the performance of the non-linear pre-coding. The embodiment of the present application determines the size of the resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of the channel correlation of the terminal device on the full bandwidth by using the most intuitive method. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the size of the resource unit. The size of the appropriate resource unit can be determined flexibly according to the channel state.
需要说明的是,由于信道的状态是实时变化的,因此该资源单位的大小的划分也需要根据信道的状态变化进行更新。It should be noted that since the state of the channel changes in real time, the division of the size of the resource unit also needs to be updated according to the state change of the channel.
应理解,本申请实施例中在更新资源单位大小后,网络设备需要重新发送第一指示信息,以指示该最新的资源单位大小,并按照更新后的资源单位大小确定预编码方式。It should be understood that, after updating the resource unit size in the embodiment of the present application, the network device needs to resend the first indication information to indicate the latest resource unit size, and determine the precoding manner according to the updated resource unit size.
应注意,在当前数据传结束后,在后续传输下行数据时,当资源单位大小没有变化时,网络设备可以不用发送该第一指示信息,终端设备可以按照上次的数据传输时网络设备的指示确定当前数据传输对应的资源单位的大小。It should be noted that, after the current data transmission ends, when the downlink data is subsequently transmitted, when the resource unit size does not change, the network device may not need to send the first indication information, and the terminal device may follow the indication of the network device during the last data transmission. Determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current data transmission.
当然,在每次数据传输时,不管资源单位的大小是否有变化,网络设备也可以均发送第一指示信息以指示资源单位的大小,本申请实施例并不限于此。Of course, in the case of the data transmission, the network device may also send the first indication information to indicate the size of the resource unit, regardless of whether the size of the resource unit changes. The embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
可选地,本申请实施例中可以周期的更新资源单位的大小。Optionally, the size of the resource unit may be periodically updated in the embodiment of the present application.
例如,更新资源单位的大小的周期单位可以是微时隙(mini slot),可以是时隙,如周期为N个时隙,其中N的取值可以为正整数,如N=1,则表示每个时隙更新一次资源单位的大小。For example, the period unit of the size of the updated resource unit may be a mini slot, which may be a time slot, such as a period of N slots, where the value of N may be a positive integer, such as N=1, indicating The size of the resource unit is updated once per time slot.
再例如N=1、2、4、8或16(分别对应15kHz,30kHz,60kHz,120kHz和240kHz的子载波间隔)则表示每个子帧更新一次资源单位的大小。Further, for example, N=1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 (corresponding to 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz, and 240 kHz subcarrier spacing, respectively) indicates that the size of the resource unit is updated once per subframe.
再例如N=10、20、40、80或160(分别对应15kHz,30kHz,60kHz,120kHz和240kHz的子载波间隔)则表示每个系统帧更新一次资源单位的大小;周期单位还可以是子帧,如M个子帧,M=1则表示每个子帧更新一次资源单位的大小,M=10则表示每个帧更新一次资源单位的大小;周期单位还可以是绝对时间,如5ms,10ms,20ms,40ms,80ms,100ms,200ms,400ms,800ms,1600ms,…等,本申请实施例并不限于此。For example, N=10, 20, 40, 80 or 160 (corresponding to 15 kHz, 30 kHz, 60 kHz, 120 kHz and 240 kHz subcarrier spacing respectively) means that the size of the resource unit is updated once per system frame; the period unit may also be a subframe For example, M subframes, M=1 means that each subframe updates the size of the resource unit, and M=10 means that the size of the resource unit is updated once per frame; the period unit can also be an absolute time, such as 5ms, 10ms, 20ms. The embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto, 40 ms, 80 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms, 400 ms, 800 ms, 1600 ms, ... and the like.
因此,本申请实施例通过周期性的更新资源单位大小,能够及时的确定与当前信道状态对应的资源单位的大小,进而可以根据更新后的资源单位的大小确定预编码方式,能够提升系统性能。Therefore, the embodiment of the present application can periodically determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current channel state by periodically updating the resource unit size, and further determine the precoding mode according to the size of the updated resource unit, thereby improving system performance.
可替代地,本申请实施例也可以非周期的更新资源单位的大小。Alternatively, the embodiment of the present application may also update the size of the resource unit aperiodically.
例如,资源单位的大小更新由网络设备或终端设备触发。For example, the size update of a resource unit is triggered by a network device or a terminal device.
由网络设备触发:网络设备根据获取到的各终端设备的信道状态信息(该信道状态信息可以包括以下至少一种:由探测参考信号(Sounding Reference signal,SRS)估计得到的信道,由终端设备反馈的信道状态信息(channel state information,CSI),信道质量指示(channel quality indicator,CQI),预编码向量指示(precoding matrix indicator,PMI),秩指示(rank indicator,RI),干扰信息等)同之前的信道状态信息进行对比,当差异超过一定阈值以后,则重新确定资源单位的大小和预编码方式。Triggered by the network device: the network device according to the obtained channel state information of each terminal device (the channel state information may include at least one of the following: a channel estimated by a Sounding Reference Signal (SRS), and feedback by the terminal device Channel state information (CSI), channel quality indicator (CQI), precoding matrix indicator (PMI), rank indicator (RI), interference information, etc. The channel state information is compared. When the difference exceeds a certain threshold, the size of the resource unit and the precoding mode are re-determined.
由终端设备触发:终端设备获取到当前其信道状态信息(该信道状态信息可以包括以下至少一种:由解调参考信号(demodulation reference signal,DMRS)和/或信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information referencesignal,CSI-RS)和/或相位跟踪参考信号(phase tracking reference signal,PTRS)和/或其他参考信号(reference signal,RS)估计得到的信道等)同之前的信道状态信息进行对比,当差异超过一定阈值以后,则向网络设备发送更新资源单位的大小和预编码方式的请求,和/或建议的资源单位大小(消息内容可以是资源单位大小的绝对值,也可以是资源单位大小的索引或编号)。网络设备在接收到该请求和/或建议值后可以选择更新或不更新该资源单位大小。Triggered by the terminal device: the terminal device acquires its current channel state information (the channel state information may include at least one of: a demodulation reference signal (DMRS) and/or a channel state information reference signal (channel state information) Referencesignal, CSI-RS) and/or phase tracking reference signal (PTRS) and/or other reference signal (RS) estimated channel, etc.) compared with previous channel state information, when the difference After a certain threshold is exceeded, the request for updating the size of the resource unit and the precoding method, and/or the recommended resource unit size (the message content may be an absolute value of the resource unit size, or an index of the resource unit size) may be sent to the network device. Or number). The network device may choose to update or not update the resource unit size after receiving the request and/or suggested value.
因此,本申请实施例通过网络设备或终端设备根据信道状态信息灵活的更新资源单位大小,在信道状态变化较大的情况下,能够及时的确定与当前信道状态对应的资源单位的大小,进而可以根据更新后的资源单位的大小确定预编码方式,能够提升系统性能。Therefore, the network device or the terminal device flexibly updates the resource unit size according to the channel state information by using the network device or the terminal device, and can determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the current channel state in time when the channel state changes greatly. The precoding method is determined according to the size of the updated resource unit, which can improve system performance.
前文介绍了一种确定资源单位的大小的方式,可替代地,在另一种可能的实现方式中,该网络设备根据多个终端设备的调度带宽的大小确定该第一资源单位的大小,The foregoing describes a manner of determining the size of a resource unit. Alternatively, in another possible implementation manner, the network device determines the size of the first resource unit according to the size of the scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices.
具体而言,网络设备可以根据多个终端设备的调度带宽确定资源单位的大小。终端设备的调度带宽越大,资源单位所占用的绝对带宽(单位为MHz)或所包含的RB数越大,终端设备的调度带宽越小,资源单位所占用的绝对带宽(单位为MHz)或所包含的RB数越小。Specifically, the network device may determine the size of the resource unit according to the scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices. The larger the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, the larger the absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit or the larger the number of RBs included, the smaller the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, the absolute bandwidth occupied by the resource unit (in MHz) or The smaller the number of RBs included.
应理解,在实际应用中,该多个终端设备中的调度带宽可能不完全相同,网络设备可以根据不同的终端设备的调度带宽确定出多个不同的资源单位的大小,这种情况下,网络设备可以根据该多个不同的资源单位的大小确定出一个值作为最终的资源单位大小。例如,取该多个值中的最小值、最大值、中间值或平均值作为最终的资源单位的大小,本申请实施例并不限于此。还应理解,当调度的多个终端设备的调度带宽相同时,此时资源单位大小可由调度带宽直接确定,即此时网络设备和终端设备均可以根据调度带宽确定资源单位大小,不需要额外的信令指示资源单位的大小。It should be understood that, in actual applications, the scheduling bandwidths of the multiple terminal devices may not be completely the same, and the network device may determine the size of multiple different resource units according to the scheduling bandwidth of different terminal devices. In this case, the network The device may determine a value as the final resource unit size according to the size of the plurality of different resource units. For example, the minimum value, the maximum value, the intermediate value, or the average value of the multiple values are taken as the size of the final resource unit, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. It should also be understood that when the scheduling bandwidths of the scheduled multiple terminal devices are the same, the resource unit size can be directly determined by the scheduling bandwidth, that is, both the network device and the terminal device can determine the resource unit size according to the scheduling bandwidth, and no additional Signaling indicates the size of the resource unit.
应理解,一旦资源单位的大小确定,在整个系统带宽上该资源单位的大小均相等。It should be understood that once the size of the resource unit is determined, the size of the resource unit is equal across the entire system bandwidth.
可替代地,在另一种可能的实现方式中,该网络设备根据该多个终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔的大小确定该第一资源单位的大小。应理解,通常该多个终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔均相同。Alternatively, in another possible implementation manner, the network device determines a size of the first resource unit according to a size of a subcarrier interval in a scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices. It should be understood that the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the plurality of terminal devices is generally the same.
具体而言,网络设备可以根据终端设备的子载波间隔确定资源单位的大小。例如,网 络设备可以根据终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔,确定出一个资源单位大小,例如,终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔越大,资源单位包含的RB数越少;子载波间隔越小,资源单位所包含的RB数越多;或终端设备的调度带宽中子载波间隔越大,资源单位所占用的绝对带宽(单位为MHz)越大,终端设备的子载波间隔越小,资源单位所占用的绝对带宽(单位为MHz)越小。可选的,网络设备也可以是根据预设的多个子载波间隔与多个资源单位大小的一一对应关系,确定当前子载波对应的一个资源单位大小。应理解,此时资源单位上多个终端的设备的子载波间隔相同,资源单位大小可由子载波间隔直接确定,即此时网络设备和终端设备均可以根据子载波间隔确定资源单位大小,不需要额外的信令指示资源单位的大小。Specifically, the network device may determine the size of the resource unit according to the subcarrier spacing of the terminal device. For example, the network device may determine a resource unit size according to the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device. For example, the larger the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, the fewer the number of RBs included in the resource unit; The smaller the interval, the more RBs the resource unit contains; or the larger the subcarrier spacing in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, the larger the absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit, and the smaller the subcarrier spacing of the terminal device. The absolute bandwidth (in MHz) occupied by the resource unit is smaller. Optionally, the network device may determine a resource unit size corresponding to the current subcarrier according to a one-to-one correspondence between the preset multiple subcarrier spacings and the multiple resource unit sizes. It should be understood that the sub-carrier spacing of the devices of the multiple terminals in the resource unit is the same, and the resource unit size can be directly determined by the sub-carrier spacing, that is, the network device and the terminal device can determine the resource unit size according to the sub-carrier spacing, and the Additional signaling indicates the size of the resource unit.
本申请实施例中网络设备可以根据子载波间隔的大小能够灵活的确定出合适的资源单位的大小。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device can flexibly determine the size of the appropriate resource unit according to the size of the subcarrier spacing.
可替代地,在另一种可能得实现方式中,该网络设备从预设的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为该第一资源单位的大小。Alternatively, in another possible implementation manner, the network device selects one of the preset multiple resource unit size values as the size of the first resource unit.
例如,资源单位大小的集合包括的资源单位大小为n个资源块组(Resource Block Group,RBG),其中n的取值可以是正整数,还可以是满足2的幂次方的正整数;或者,资源单位大小的集合包括的资源单位大小为n个资源块(Resource Block,RB),其中n可以是整数,还可以是满足2的幂次方的正整数;或资源单位大小的集合包括的资源单位大小为1/n*BW sys,其中BW sys为系统带宽,单位为兆(M),如BW sys=400M,n是满足2的幂次方的正整数,如n=1,2,4,8,…,即资源单位的大小可以为400M,200M,100M,50M,…。 For example, the resource unit size includes a resource unit size (Resource Block Group, RBG), where the value of n may be a positive integer, or may be a positive integer satisfying a power of 2; or The resource unit size set includes a resource unit size of n resource blocks (Resource Blocks, RBs), where n may be an integer, or may be a positive integer satisfying a power of 2; or a resource included in a set of resource unit sizes The unit size is 1/n*BW sys , where BW sys is the system bandwidth in mega (M), such as BW sys =400M, n is a positive integer satisfying the power of 2, such as n=1, 2, 4 , 8, ..., that is, the size of the resource unit can be 400M, 200M, 100M, 50M, ....
本申请实施例,通过规定资源单位大小的集合,直接从该集合中选取资源单位的大小,能够降低实现的复杂低,减少信令开销。In the embodiment of the present application, by specifying a set of resource unit sizes, the size of the resource unit is directly selected from the set, which can reduce the complexity of the implementation and reduce the signaling overhead.
可选地,作为另一实施例,该网络设备从预设的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为该第一资源单位的大小,包括:Optionally, as another embodiment, the network device selects one of the preset values of the multiple resource unit sizes as the size of the first resource unit, including:
该网络设备根据该终端设备间信道相关性的波动程度、终端设备的调度带宽的大小和终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔的大小中的至少一种,从预设的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为该第一资源单位的大小。The network device is configured according to at least one of a predetermined plurality of resource unit sizes according to at least one of a degree of fluctuation of channel correlation between the terminal devices, a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a size of a subcarrier interval in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device. One of the values is selected as the size of the first resource unit.
需注意的是,网络设备选择多个资源单位大小取值(即资源单位大小的集合)中的某一个值作为资源单位大小时,也可以选择参考当前信道的状态,如根据终端设备间信道相关性,在集合中选择一个最接近的值或取对数后最接近的值,作为资源单位大小。例如,集合中的资源单位大小表示为{SubBW i},i=1,2,…,根据终端设备间信道相关性确定的资源单位大小为x,则最接近的资源单位大小可以为满足(x/SubBW i)≤1中最大的i,也可以为满足(x/SubBW i)≥1中最小的i,还可以为使得(x/SubBW i)最接近1的i,如abs((x/SubBW i)-1)最小的i,本申请实施例并不限于此。下面举例进行详细说明:若资源单位大小的集合是{400M,200M,100M,50M},当根据终端设备间信道相关性确定出的资源单位大小小于50M时,可选方案之一为选择50M为资源单位大小;当根据终端设备间信道相关性确定出的资源单位大小大于75M,小于150M时,可选方案之一为选择100M为资源单位大小。 It should be noted that when the network device selects one of the multiple resource unit size values (that is, the set of resource unit sizes) as the resource unit size, the network device may also select the state of the current channel, such as according to the channel correlation between the terminal devices. Sex, select the closest value in the collection or the closest value after the logarithm as the resource unit size. For example, the resource unit size in the set is expressed as {SubBW i }, i=1, 2, ..., and the resource unit size determined according to the channel correlation between the terminal devices is x, and the closest resource unit size may be satisfied (x) /SubBW i ) The largest i in ≤1, which can also satisfy the minimum i of (x/SubBW i )≥1, and can also be the i that makes (x/SubBW i ) closest to 1, such as abs((x/) SubBW i )-1) The smallest i, the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto. The following example is described in detail: If the resource unit size set is {400M, 200M, 100M, 50M}, when the resource unit size determined according to the channel correlation between the terminal devices is less than 50M, one of the alternatives is to select 50M. The size of the resource unit; when the resource unit size determined by the channel correlation between the terminal devices is greater than 75M and less than 150M, one of the alternatives is to select 100M as the resource unit size.
同理,本申请实施例中也可以预先建立或配置子载波间隔和/或调度带宽大小与集合中的资源单位大小的关系,然后网络设备根据当前数据的子载波间隔和/或调度带宽大小 从资源单位大小的集合中确定其一为资源单位大小。Similarly, in the embodiment of the present application, the relationship between the subcarrier spacing and/or the scheduling bandwidth size and the resource unit size in the set may also be established or configured in advance, and then the network device selects the subcarrier spacing and/or the scheduling bandwidth according to the current data. One of the resource unit size sets determines the size of the resource unit.
方式三:Method three:
网络设备和终端设备按照相同的方式或规则确定该第一资源单位的大小。这种情况下,由于收发两端采用相同的方式或规则能够确定出相同的资源单位的大小。因此,网络设备不需要向终端设备发送额外的资源单位的大小的指示信息。The network device and the terminal device determine the size of the first resource unit in the same manner or rule. In this case, the same resource unit size can be determined by the same method or rule at both ends of the transceiver. Therefore, the network device does not need to send an indication of the size of the additional resource unit to the terminal device.
相应的,作为另一实施例,该方法还包括:Correspondingly, as another embodiment, the method further includes:
该网络设备根据预设参数确定该第一资源单位的大小,该预设参数包括终端设备的调度带宽的大小、终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔。The network device determines a size of the first resource unit according to a preset parameter, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
相对应地,终端设备也可以根据预设参数确定该第一资源单位的大小。Correspondingly, the terminal device may also determine the size of the first resource unit according to preset parameters.
具体而言,网络设备可以根据该预设参数采用与终端设备相同的一套预设方式或规则确定该资源单位的大小。Specifically, the network device may determine the size of the resource unit according to the preset parameter by using a set of preset manners or rules that are the same as the terminal device.
例如,在收发端已确定或约定好子载波间隔和/或调度带宽大小与集合中的资源单位大小的关系后,当前传输数据时用于确定预编码方式的资源单位大小可由子载波间隔和/或调度带宽隐式指示,具体举例如:若集合中的资源单位大小是{25个RB,50个RB,100个RB},分别对应子载波间隔{120k,60k,30k};若资源单位大小是{16个RB,32个RB,64个RB,128个RB},分别对应子载波间隔{240k,120k,60k,30k}等。这种情况下,网络设备和终端设备可以根据上述子载波间隔与资源单位的大小的对应关系确定子载波对应的资源单位的大小。For example, after the transceiver end has determined or agreed on the relationship between the subcarrier spacing and/or the scheduling bandwidth size and the resource unit size in the set, the resource unit size used to determine the precoding mode when the data is currently transmitted may be separated by the subcarrier spacing and/or Or scheduling bandwidth implicit indication, for example, if the resource unit size in the set is {25 RB, 50 RB, 100 RB}, respectively corresponding to the subcarrier spacing {120k, 60k, 30k}; if the resource unit size It is {16 RBs, 32 RBs, 64 RBs, 128 RBs}, corresponding to the subcarrier spacing {240k, 120k, 60k, 30k}, and so on. In this case, the network device and the terminal device may determine the size of the resource unit corresponding to the subcarrier according to the correspondence between the subcarrier spacing and the size of the resource unit.
本申请实施例中,由于网络设备和终端设备按照相同的规则确定该资源单位的大小,因此,网络设备无需额外通过信令指示终端设备该资源单位的大小,能够降低实现的复杂低,减少信令开销。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device and the terminal device determine the size of the resource unit according to the same rule. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the size of the resource unit of the terminal device by using signaling, which can reduce the complexity of the implementation and reduce the number of the information. Make the cost.
320,网络设备根据该多个信道相关性值,确定该多个终端设备中的每个终端设备对应的预编码方式。320. The network device determines, according to the multiple channel correlation values, a precoding manner corresponding to each of the plurality of terminal devices.
其中,第一终端设备对应第一预编码方式,该第一终端设备为该多个终端设备中的任意一个。The first terminal device corresponds to the first precoding mode, and the first terminal device is any one of the multiple terminal devices.
作为示例而非限定,下面描述一种网络设备确定各个终端设备对应的预编码方式的方案:By way of example and not limitation, a scheme in which a network device determines a precoding manner corresponding to each terminal device is described below:
假设有5个终端设备使用第一资源单位通信,每个终端设备的数据层数均为单层,则网络设备总共要发射5层数据。Assuming that five terminal devices communicate using the first resource unit, and the number of data layers of each terminal device is a single layer, the network device transmits a total of five layers of data.
网络设备可以通过以下步骤确定每个终端设备对应的预编码方式:The network device can determine the precoding mode corresponding to each terminal device by the following steps:
步骤1:网络设备分别获取5个终端设备的信道,分别为信道1,信道2,…,信道5Step 1: The network device obtains the channels of the five terminal devices, respectively, channel 1, channel 2, ..., channel 5
步骤2:网络设备分别计算每两个终端设备间的信道相关性值,得到维度为N*N即5*5的相关性矩阵R,其中R pq表示第p个终端设备与第q个终端设备的信道相关性,由此可知,R的对角线元素为1,且关于对角线对称,即R pq=R qpStep 2: The network device separately calculates the channel correlation value between each two terminal devices, and obtains a correlation matrix R with a dimension of N*N, that is, 5*5, where R pq represents the pth terminal device and the qth terminal device. The channel correlation, from which it can be seen that the diagonal element of R is 1, and is symmetric about the diagonal, that is, R pq = R qp .
假设一个资源单位包括多个RBG,那么一种确定相关性矩阵的方法为即先确定第i个TTI时第j个RBG上个UE的相关性然后在RBG上求平均,得到一个资源单位上的相关性矩阵R (i),其中i表示TTI的索引,j表示一个资源单位中的RBG的索引 Assuming that one resource unit includes multiple RBGs, a method for determining the correlation matrix is to first determine the correlation of the jth RBG last UE when the ith TTI is first, and then average the RBG to obtain a resource unit. Correlation matrix R (i) , where i represents the index of the TTI and j represents the index of the RBG in a resource unit
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000005
其中
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000006
可以表示为[v 1,v 2,...v 5],其中v k表示第k个终端设备在第i个TTI第j个RBG的右奇异向量,维度为N t*1,N t表示网络设备的发射天线数,
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000007
表示对矩阵
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000008
中的每一个元素分别求复数的模值,例如a+j*b的模值为sqrt(a^2+b^2)。
among them
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000006
It can be expressed as [v 1 , v 2 , ... v 5 ], where v k represents the right singular vector of the jth terminal device at the jth RBG of the i th TTI, the dimension is N t *1, N t represents The number of transmit antennas of the network device,
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000007
Representation matrix
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000008
Each element in the equation is a complex modulus value, for example, the modulus value of a+j*b is sqrt(a^2+b^2).
应理解,若是本申请实施例中周期性的间隔多个时隙重新配一次预编码模式,则各时隙获取的相关性矩阵
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000009
可能还存在一个α滤波的操作,其中,α为滤波因子,α的取值可以为网络设备配置的,也可为预设值。
It should be understood that, if the precoding mode is re-allocated with multiple time slots periodically in the embodiment of the present application, the correlation matrix acquired in each time slot is used.
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000009
There may also be an alpha filtering operation, where α is a filtering factor, and the value of α may be configured by the network device or may be a preset value.
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000010
例如,在步骤2中得到的相关性矩阵为:For example, the correlation matrix obtained in step 2 is:
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000011
步骤3:选出第一层的终端设备。Step 3: Select the terminal device of the first layer.
也就是说,网络设备需要根据相关性矩阵选择各层的终端设备。That is to say, the network device needs to select the terminal devices of each layer according to the correlation matrix.
作为示例,而非限定,下面描述选出第一层终端设备的几种方式。By way of example and not limitation, several ways of selecting a first layer terminal device are described below.
方式A:计算每一个终端设备与其他终端设备的平均相关性,选相关性最小的终端设备为第一层终端设备。Method A: Calculate the average correlation between each terminal device and other terminal devices, and select the terminal device with the least correlation as the first layer terminal device.
例如,5个终端设备的平均信道相关性值分别为:0.386,0.640,0.456,0.664,0.522。For example, the average channel correlation values of the five terminal devices are: 0.386, 0.640, 0.456, 0.664, and 0.522, respectively.
其中第一个终端设备的平均相关性最小,因此其为第一层终端设备。The first terminal device has the smallest average correlation, so it is the first layer terminal device.
应理解,上述计算终端设备的平均相关性的结果中包含了UE自己与自己的相关性,即包含了对角线元素,终端设备的平均相关性为sum(R)/5,其中,sum(R)表示对矩阵的每一行或每一列求和。可选的,作为另外一种方案,计算终端设备的平均相关性时也可以不包括对角元素求平均,即计算终端设备的平均相关性为(sum(R)-1)/4。It should be understood that the result of calculating the average correlation of the terminal device includes the UE's own correlation with itself, that is, the diagonal element is included, and the average correlation of the terminal device is sum(R)/5, where sum( R) means summing each row or column of the matrix. Optionally, as another solution, when calculating the average correlation of the terminal device, the diagonal element may not be averaged, that is, the average correlation of the computing terminal device is (sum(R)-1)/4.
方式B:预定义或默认或配置相关性的门限为λ R,比较其与R ij的大小,统计各终端设备与其他终端设备的信道相关性中比λ R小(或者小于等于λ R)的相关性的数目,选数目最多的终端设备为第一层终端设备 Mode B: The threshold of the predefined or default or configuration correlation is λ R , and the size of R ij is compared, and the channel correlation between each terminal device and other terminal devices is smaller than λ R (or less than or equal to λ R ). The number of correlations, the most selected terminal device is the first layer terminal device
如假设λ R=0.5,五个终端设备中与其他终端设备的信道相关性小于(或者小于等于)λ R的数量分别为(即R每一列元素中除了对角线元素以外的其他元素中小于λ R的元素个数):4,2,3,2,3,因此第一个终端设备为第一层终端设备 Assume that λ R = 0.5, the channel correlations with other terminal devices in the five terminal devices are less than (or less than or equal to) the number of λ R is (ie, less than the other elements of the R elements in each column other than the diagonal elements) The number of elements of λ R ): 4, 2, 3, 2, 3, so the first terminal device is the first layer terminal device
注意:若存在多个终端设备,其信道相关性值小于或等于λ R数量相同,则选择该多个终端设备中相关性和最小的终端设备,或其中平均相关性最小的终端设备为第一层终端设备,本申请实施例并不限于此。 Note: if there are multiple terminal devices whose channel correlation values are less than or equal to the same number of λ Rs , the correlation and the smallest terminal devices among the plurality of terminal devices are selected, or the terminal device with the smallest average correlation is the first The layer terminal device, the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
方式C:网络设备调度的多个终端设备中标号最小的终端设备为第一层终端设备,即终端设备1。Mode C: The terminal device with the smallest label among the plurality of terminal devices scheduled by the network device is the first layer terminal device, that is, the terminal device 1.
由于每个终端设备均对应于一个标识或者标号,例如,终端设备1的至终端设备5的 标号为别为1至5,那么网络设备可以选择标号最小的终端设备,即终端设备1作为该第一层终端设备。Since each terminal device corresponds to one identifier or label, for example, the label of the terminal device 1 to the terminal device 5 is other numbers 1 to 5, the network device can select the terminal device with the smallest label, that is, the terminal device 1 as the first A layer of terminal equipment.
步骤4:选出其他层的终端设备。Step 4: Select the terminal devices of other layers.
网络设备可以按信道相关性对调度终端设备进行排序,如排序为i的终端设备则调度在第i层,同时根据信道相关性确定各终端设备的预编码方式。具体而言,网络设备依次确认第2层、第3层..第n层的终端设备。例如,以已排序的i-1层终端设备为准,依次计算剩下的终端设备与当前已排序的前i-1层终端设备的平均相关性,选择平均相关性最小的终端设备为第i层的终端设备,并比较该第i层终端设备对应与当前已排序的前i-1层终端设备的平均信道相关性值与预定义或配置的线性预编码的相关性门限λ NonTHP的大小,如果该平均平均信道相关性值小于等于(或者小于)λ NonTHP,则该第i层终端设备对应的预编码方式是线性预编码方式,否则为非线性预编码方式。 The network device may sort the scheduling terminal devices according to channel correlation. For example, the terminal devices ranked as i are scheduled at the i-th layer, and the pre-coding manner of each terminal device is determined according to the channel correlation. Specifically, the network device sequentially confirms the second layer, the third layer, and the nth layer terminal device. For example, based on the sorted i-1 layer terminal device, the average correlation between the remaining terminal devices and the currently sorted pre-i-1 layer terminal devices is sequentially calculated, and the terminal device with the smallest average correlation is selected as the i-th. The terminal device of the layer, and compares the average channel correlation value of the i-th terminal device corresponding to the currently sorted pre-i-1 layer terminal device with the pre-defined or configured linear precoding correlation threshold λ NonTHP , If the average average channel correlation value is less than or equal to (or less than) λ NonTHP , the precoding mode corresponding to the i th layer terminal device is a linear precoding mode, otherwise it is a nonlinear precoding mode.
下面以λ NonTHP为0.4为例,描述网络设备确定第二至第五层的具体例子。 The following is a specific example of determining the second to fifth layers of the network device by taking λ NonTHP as 0.4 as an example.
确定第二层的终端设备:剩下的终端设备(终端设备2~终端设备5)与第一层终端设备的相关性分别为[0.15,0.14,0.40,0.24],其中与终端设备1的相关性的最小的终端设备为终端设备3,因此终端设备3为第二层终端设备。Determining the terminal device of the second layer: the correlation between the remaining terminal devices (the terminal device 2 to the terminal device 5) and the first layer terminal device is [0.15, 0.14, 0.40, 0.24], respectively, where the correlation with the terminal device 1 is The smallest terminal device is the terminal device 3, and thus the terminal device 3 is a second layer terminal device.
确定第三层的终端设备:剩下的终端设备(终端设备2,终端设备4,终端设备5)与第一层终端设备(终端设备1)和第二层的终端设备(终端设备3)间的平均相关性分别为[0.5,0.32,0.145],因此终端设备5为第三层的终端设备。Determining the terminal device of the third layer: between the remaining terminal devices (terminal device 2, terminal device 4, terminal device 5) and the first layer terminal device (terminal device 1) and the second layer terminal device (terminal device 3) The average correlation is [0.5, 0.32, 0.145], respectively, so the terminal device 5 is the terminal device of the third layer.
以此类推…,最后确定的终端设备顺序以及确定顺序时所用的平均信道相关性为:[终端设备1(0.386),终端设备3(0.14),终端设备5(0.145),终端设备2(0.4733),终端设备4(0.58)],其中终端设备2和终端设备4的平均相关性大于λ NonTHP,因此,终端设备2和终端设备4对应的预编码方式为非线性预编码。终端设备3和终端设备5的平均相关性小于λ NonTHP,因此,终端设备3和终端设备4对应的预编码方式为线性预编码。其中,终端设备1位于第一层,不会受到其他终端设备的干扰,因此,终端设备1采用的预编码方式为可根据实际情况在为线性和非线性预编码方式中选择,当剩下的其他终端设备都是非线性预编码或排在其后面的第一个终端设备是非线性预编码时,终端设备1则可以选择非线性预编码,当排在其后面的第一个终端设备是线性预编码时,终端设备1则选择线性预编码。 And so on, the final determined terminal device order and the average channel correlation used in determining the order are: [terminal device 1 (0.386), terminal device 3 (0.14), terminal device 5 (0.145), terminal device 2 (0.4733) ), the terminal device 4 (0.58)], wherein the average correlation between the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 4 is greater than λ NonTHP , and therefore, the precoding method corresponding to the terminal device 2 and the terminal device 4 is nonlinear precoding. The average correlation between the terminal device 3 and the terminal device 5 is less than λ NonTHP , and therefore, the precoding method corresponding to the terminal device 3 and the terminal device 4 is linear precoding. The terminal device 1 is located at the first layer and is not interfered by other terminal devices. Therefore, the precoding mode adopted by the terminal device 1 can be selected in a linear and nonlinear precoding manner according to actual conditions, when the remaining When the other terminal equipment is non-linearly precoded or the first terminal equipment behind it is nonlinear precoding, the terminal equipment 1 can select nonlinear precoding, and the first terminal equipment behind it is linear pre- At the time of encoding, the terminal device 1 selects linear precoding.
应理解,上述根据信道相关性确定预编码方式仅为示例,实际情况中还可以根据信道的其他参数,如信道的能量、终端设备的信干噪比等确定终端设备对应的预编码方式;或者采用其他调度算法等确定终端设备对应的预编码方式,本申请实施例并不限于此。It should be understood that the foregoing determining the precoding mode according to the channel correlation is only an example. In actual situations, the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device may be determined according to other parameters of the channel, such as the energy of the channel, the signal to interference and noise ratio of the terminal device, or the like; or The precoding method corresponding to the terminal device is determined by using other scheduling algorithms and the like, and the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
应理解,在网络设备确定了终端设备对应的预编码方式后,网络设备需要指示相应的终端设备对应的预编码方式。It should be understood that after the network device determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device, the network device needs to indicate the precoding mode corresponding to the corresponding terminal device.
可选地,本申请实施例中,网络设备可以显式的指示预编码方式,也可以隐式的指示预编码方式。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, the network device may explicitly indicate the precoding mode, or may implicitly indicate the precoding mode.
下面首先介绍本申请实施例中显式指示预编码方式的方案。The scheme of explicitly indicating the precoding method in the embodiment of the present application is first introduced below.
相应地,作为另一实施例,该方法还可以包括:Correspondingly, as another embodiment, the method may further include:
该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,该第二指示信息用于指示该第一预编码方式。The network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
可选的,作为一个实施例,该第二指示信息为位图的形式,该第二指示信息的比特数与该第一终端设备的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,该第二指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的预编码方式。Optionally, as an embodiment, the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device, where the Each bit in the two indication information is used to indicate a precoding manner corresponding to one resource unit.
例如,本申请实施例中可以通过位图(bitmap)的形式显式指示每个资源单位的预编码方式,如资源单位数为4个时,则位图共有4位,如0110分别表示四个资源单位上的预编码方式为{线性预编码,非线性预编码,非线性预编码,线性预编码},或{非线性预编码,线性预编码,线性预编码,非线性预编码}。For example, in the embodiment of the present application, the precoding mode of each resource unit may be explicitly indicated in the form of a bitmap. If the number of resource units is four, the bitmap has four bits, for example, 0110 indicates four. The precoding method on the resource unit is {linear precoding, nonlinear precoding, nonlinear precoding, linear precoding}, or {nonlinear precoding, linear precoding, linear precoding, nonlinear precoding}.
本申请实施例通过显式的方式指示预编码方式,因此,终端设备可以根据该第二指示信息直接确定各个资源单位对应的预编码方式,无需额外的计算过程,能够降低实现复杂度。。The embodiment of the present application indicates the precoding mode in an explicit manner. Therefore, the terminal device can directly determine the precoding mode corresponding to each resource unit according to the second indication information, and does not need an additional calculation process, thereby reducing implementation complexity. .
下面介绍本申请实施例中隐式指示预编码方式的方案。The scheme of implicitly indicating the precoding method in the embodiment of the present application is described below.
相应地,作为另一实施例,该方法还可以包括:Correspondingly, as another embodiment, the method may further include:
该网络设备通过该第一资源单位发送解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列指示预编码方式,该DMRS序列和该PTRS序列的相位差(也可以称为DMRS序列和该PTRS序列的发送信号之间的相位差)用于指示该第一终端设备使用该第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式。The network device sends a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence to indicate a precoding manner by using the first resource unit, and a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence (also referred to as a DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence) The phase difference between the transmitted signals is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit.
需要说明的是,由于相位噪声等因素的影响,当DMRS序列和PTRS序列的发送信号完全相同时,DMRS序列和PTRS序列的接收信号本身存在接收相位误差。接收相位误差表示DMRS序列和PTRS的序列的接收信号之间的相位差,与发送信号之间的相位差的差值。例如,发送信号的相位差为0时,接收相位误差等于DMRS序列与PTRS序列的接收信号之间的相位差。It should be noted that, due to factors such as phase noise, when the transmission signals of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence are completely the same, the received signals of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence have a reception phase error. The reception phase error represents the difference between the phase difference between the received signals of the DMRS sequence and the sequence of the PTRS, and the phase difference between the transmitted signals. For example, when the phase difference of the transmitted signal is 0, the received phase error is equal to the phase difference between the received signal of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence.
考虑到上述接收相位误差,本申请实施例中,可以将资源单位的预编码方式由DMRS序列和PTRS序列之间的发送信号相位差确定,如:In the embodiment of the present application, the precoding manner of the resource unit may be determined by the phase difference of the transmitted signal between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence, such as:
当上述两个序列的接收相位误差的取值范围为(-π/2,π/2)时,预编码方式与上述两个序列的发送信号的相位差的对应关系如下:When the range of the received phase error of the above two sequences is (-π/2, π/2), the correspondence between the precoding method and the phase difference of the transmitted signals of the above two sequences is as follows:
线性预编码:PTRS序列和DMRS序列完全相同,相位差为0°。Linear precoding: The PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence are identical, with a phase difference of 0°.
非线性预编码:PTRS序列和DMRS序列相反,相位差为180°。Nonlinear precoding: The PTRS sequence is opposite to the DMRS sequence with a phase difference of 180°.
当上述两个序列的接收相位误差的取值范围为(-π/3,π/3)时,该两个序列的发送信号相位差可以同时指示预编码方式以及功率调整方式,预编码方式与序列相位差(发送信号的相位差)的对应关系如下:When the range of the received phase error of the above two sequences is (-π/3, π/3), the phase difference of the transmitted signals of the two sequences may simultaneously indicate the precoding mode and the power adjustment mode, and the precoding method and The correspondence between the sequence phase differences (phase difference of the transmitted signals) is as follows:
线性预编码:PTRS序列和DMRS序列完全相同,即相位差为0°Linear precoding: The PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence are identical, that is, the phase difference is 0°.
非线性预编码,并求模调整功率:PTRS序列和DMRS序列相位差为2/3π。Nonlinear precoding, and modulo adjustment power: the phase difference between the PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence is 2/3π.
非线性预编码,并功率回退调整功率:PTRS序列和DMRS序列相位差为-2/3π。Nonlinear precoding, and power back-off adjustment power: PTRS sequence and DMRS sequence phase difference is -2/3π.
应理解,上述例子中所指示的信息与相位差的对应关系仅为举例,本申请并不限定于此,即所指示的信息和相位差之间的对应关系可以任意交换。It should be understood that the correspondence between the information indicated in the above example and the phase difference is only an example, and the present application is not limited thereto, that is, the correspondence between the indicated information and the phase difference can be arbitrarily exchanged.
前文介绍了通过PTRS序列和DMRS序列发送信号的相位差隐式指示预编码方式的方案,可替代地,上述隐式指示的方法还可以扩展至两个或多个PTRS符号上PTRS序列间的相位差。相应地,作为一个实施例,该方法还包括:The foregoing describes a scheme of phase difference implicit indication precoding by transmitting signals of a PTRS sequence and a DMRS sequence. Alternatively, the implicit indication method may be extended to phase between PTRS sequences on two or more PTRS symbols. difference. Correspondingly, as an embodiment, the method further includes:
该网络设备通过该第一资源单位中的多个符号发送PTRS序列,其中该多个符号包 括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,该第一符号集合上该PTRS序列的相位差与该第二符号集合上的该PTRS序列的发送信号相位差用于指示该第一终端设备使用该第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式。The network device sends a PTRS sequence by using a plurality of symbols in the first resource unit, where the plurality of symbols includes a first symbol set and a second symbol set, a phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set and the second The transmit signal phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the set of symbols is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit.
例如,所有符号上PTRS的序列相位完全相同表示线性预编码;奇数符号上PTRS的序列相位与偶数符号上的PTRS序列相位差为180°指示非线性预编码,或相位差为2/3π指示非线性预编码,并求模调整功率;奇数符号上PTRS的序列相位与偶数符号上的PTRS序列相位差为-2/3π指示非线性预编码,并功率回退调整功率;其中奇数和偶数还可以替换成前n个和后m个,即前n个PTRS符号上的PTRS序列与后m个PTRS符号上的PTRS相位表示不同的信息。For example, the sequence phase of PTRS on all symbols is exactly the same to indicate linear precoding; the phase difference between the sequence phase of the PTRS on the odd symbol and the PTRS sequence on the even symbol is 180° indicating nonlinear precoding, or the phase difference is 2/3π indicating non Linear precoding, and modulo adjustment power; the phase difference between the sequence phase of the PTRS on the odd symbol and the PTRS sequence on the even symbol is -2/3π indicating nonlinear precoding, and the power back is adjusted to adjust the power; wherein the odd and even numbers can also be The information is replaced by the first n and the last m, that is, the PTRS sequence on the first n PTRS symbols and the PTRS phase on the last m PTRS symbols represent different information.
本申请实施例通过隐式的方式指示预编码方式,因此,网络设备无需额外通过信令指示该预编码方式,能够节省信令开销。The embodiment of the present application indicates the precoding mode in an implicit manner. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the precoding mode by signaling, which can save signaling overhead.
需要说明的是,在采用非线性编码的情况下,为了调整因减去干扰导致抬升的功率。网络设备需要对发送数据的功率进行调整。具体地,网络设备可以采用以下两种功率调整方式。It should be noted that in the case of using nonlinear encoding, in order to adjust the power that is lifted due to the subtraction of the interference. The network device needs to adjust the power of the transmitted data. Specifically, the network device can adopt the following two power adjustment modes.
第一种功率调整方式为:求模方式。即将干扰消除后的信号映射回当前调制方式所在的原始星座图内。求模后的信号公式可表示为:The first type of power adjustment is: modulo mode. The interference-cancelled signal is mapped back into the original constellation where the current modulation scheme is located. The signal formula after modulo can be expressed as:
X’=mod(x,T)=x+n*T+m*j*T,X'=mod(x,T)=x+n*T+m*j*T,
其中x为经过干扰消除后的信号;T为原始星座图的大小,与调制阶数有关,调制阶数为2,4,6时分别为4/sqrt(2),8/sqrt(10),16/sqrt(42);Where x is the signal after interference cancellation; T is the size of the original constellation, which is related to the modulation order. The modulation order is 2, 4, and 6 is 4/sqrt(2), 8/sqrt(10), respectively. 16/sqrt(42);
X’为求模后的信号;X' is the signal after modulo;
n,m为使得X’的实部和虚部均在集合[-sqrt(T)/2,sqrt(T)/2]内的唯一整数值;n, m is a unique integer value such that both the real part and the imaginary part of X' are in the set [-sqrt(T)/2, sqrt(T)/2];
如图4所示,横坐标表示同相分量,纵坐标表示正交分量,以16QAM为例,原始星座图的范围由黑色实线框所标识,扩展星座图的由虚线框表示,若原始信号的星座点为A,经过干扰消除后,变成信号B,求模操作即将B折叠回原始星座图范围内的对应点,即图中所示的C,其中,B在扩展星座图中的相对位置与C在原始星座图中的相对位置相同。As shown in FIG. 4, the abscissa represents the in-phase component, and the ordinate represents the orthogonal component. Taking 16QAM as an example, the range of the original constellation is identified by a black solid line frame, and the extended constellation is represented by a dashed box, if the original signal is The constellation point is A. After interference cancellation, it becomes signal B. The modulo operation is to fold B back to the corresponding point within the original constellation map, that is, C shown in the figure, where B is relative position in the extended constellation. The same position as C in the original constellation.
第二种功率调整方式为:功率回退方式。假设每个终端设备都是单流,则第k个终端设备的消除干扰功率回退后的信号为:The second power adjustment mode is: power backoff mode. Assuming that each terminal device is a single stream, the signal after the interference cancellation power backoff of the kth terminal device is:
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000012
其中,a k表示第k个终端设备的原始信号,λ k表示功率回退因子,
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000013
表示前面k-1个终端设备对第k的终端设备的总干扰。
Where a k represents the original signal of the kth terminal device, and λ k represents the power backoff factor,
Figure PCTCN2019081769-appb-000013
Indicates the total interference of the k-1 terminal devices to the kth terminal device.
为了使得终端设备正确的解调数据,网络设备需要指示终端设备该功率调整方式为上述第一种还是第二种功率调整方式。In order to enable the terminal device to correctly demodulate data, the network device needs to indicate whether the power adjustment mode of the terminal device is the foregoing first or second power adjustment mode.
可选地,本申请实施例中,在非线性预编码方式下,网络设备可以显式地指示功率调整方式,也可以隐式地指示功率调整方式。Optionally, in the embodiment of the present application, in the non-linear precoding mode, the network device may explicitly indicate the power adjustment mode, or may implicitly indicate the power adjustment mode.
下面首先介绍本申请实施例中显式指示功率调整方式的方案。The scheme of explicitly indicating the power adjustment mode in the embodiment of the present application is first described below.
相应地,作为另一实施例,,该第一终端设备使用该第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式为非线性预编码方式,该方法还包括:Correspondingly, as another embodiment, the precoding mode when the first terminal device uses the first resource unit to communicate is a non-linear precoding mode, and the method further includes:
该网络设备确定通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式;Determining, by the network device, a power adjustment manner when the first resource unit sends data to the first terminal device;
该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第三指示信息,该第三指示信息用于指示该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
可选的,作为另一实施例,该第三指示信息为位图的形式,该第三指示信息的比特数与该第一终端设备的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,该第三指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的功率调整方式。Optionally, in another embodiment, the third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the third indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device, where Each bit in the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment manner corresponding to one resource unit.
例如,本申请实施例中可以通过位图(bitmap)的形式指示每个资源单位的功率调整方式,如资源单位数为4个且四个资源单位上,则位图共有4位,如当四个资源单位都是非线性预编码时,0110分别表示四个资源单位上的预编码方式为{求模,功率回退,功率回退,求模},或{功率回退,求模,求模,功率回退};若终端设备在其中某些资源单位上的预编码方式是线性预编码,则位图所指示的功率调整方式无效。For example, in the embodiment of the present application, the power adjustment mode of each resource unit may be indicated in the form of a bitmap. For example, if the number of resource units is 4 and four resource units, the bitmap has 4 bits, such as four. When the resource units are all nonlinear precoding, 0110 indicates that the precoding methods on the four resource units are {modulo, power back, power back, modulo}, or {power back, modulo, modulo , power back}; if the precoding mode of the terminal equipment on some of the resource units is linear precoding, the power adjustment mode indicated by the bitmap is invalid.
本申请实施例通过显式地方式指示功率调整方式,因此,终端设备可以根据该第二指示信息直接确定各个资源单位对应的功率调整方式,无需额外的计算过程,能够降低实现复杂度。The power adjustment mode is directly indicated in the embodiment of the present application. Therefore, the terminal device can directly determine the power adjustment mode corresponding to each resource unit according to the second indication information, and the implementation complexity can be reduced without an additional calculation process.
下面介绍本申请实施例中和隐式指示功率调整方式的方案。The solution in the embodiment of the present application and the implicit indication power adjustment mode are described below.
相应地,作为另一实施例,该方法还包括:Correspondingly, as another embodiment, the method further includes:
该网络设备通过该第一资源单位发送解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列,该DMRS序列和该PTRS序列的相位差(也可以称为DMRS序列和该PTRS序列的发送信号之间的相位差)用于指示该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends, by using the first resource unit, a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence, and a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence (which may also be referred to as a DMRS sequence and a transmission signal of the PTRS sequence) The phase difference is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
具体的,该方法与预编码方式的隐式指示方法同,即将功率调整方式由DMRS序列和PTRS序列发送信号之间的相位差确定。Specifically, the method is the same as the implicit indication method of the precoding method, that is, the power adjustment mode is determined by the phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence transmission signal.
需要说明的是,由于相位噪声等因素的影响,DMRS序列和PTRS序列的接收信号本身存在接收相位误差。接收相位误差表示DMRS序列和PTRS的序列的接收信号之间的相位差,与发送信号之间的相位差的差值。例如,发送信号的相位差为0时,接收相位误差等于DMRS序列与PTRS序列的接收信号之间的相位差。It should be noted that the received signal of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence itself has a reception phase error due to factors such as phase noise. The reception phase error represents the difference between the phase difference between the received signals of the DMRS sequence and the sequence of the PTRS, and the phase difference between the transmitted signals. For example, when the phase difference of the transmitted signal is 0, the received phase error is equal to the phase difference between the received signal of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence.
如当DMRS序列与PTRS序列的的接收相位误差(相位噪声带来的误差范围)的取值范围为(-π/2,π/2)时,DMRS序列和PTRS序列的相位差(发送信号之间的相位差)与功率调整的对应关系如下:For example, when the receiving phase error of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence (the error range due to phase noise) is in the range of (-π/2, π/2), the phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence (transmitting the signal) The correspondence between the phase difference and the power adjustment is as follows:
求模调整功率:PTRS序列和DMRS序列完全相同,相位差为0°。Modulating power adjustment: The PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence are identical, and the phase difference is 0°.
功率回退调整功率:PTRS序列和DMRS序列相反,相位差为180°。Power back-off adjustment power: The PTRS sequence is opposite to the DMRS sequence, and the phase difference is 180°.
需要说明的是,在二者的接收相位误差的取值范围包含于(-π/3,π/3)时,该两个序列的发送信号相位差可以同时指示预编码方式以及功率调整方式,功率调整方式与序列相位差的对应关系如下:It should be noted that when the range of the received phase error of the two is included in (-π/3, π/3), the phase difference of the transmitted signals of the two sequences may simultaneously indicate the precoding mode and the power adjustment mode. The correspondence between the power adjustment method and the sequence phase difference is as follows:
线性预编码:PTRS序列和DMRS序列完全相同,相位差为0°。Linear precoding: The PTRS sequence and the DMRS sequence are identical, with a phase difference of 0°.
非线性预编码,并求模调整功率:PTRS序列和DMRS序列相位差为2/3π(pi)。Nonlinear precoding, and modulo adjustment power: PTRS sequence and DMRS sequence phase difference is 2/3π (pi).
非线性预编码,并功率回退调整功率:PTRS序列和DMRS序列相位差为-2/3π。Nonlinear precoding, and power back-off adjustment power: PTRS sequence and DMRS sequence phase difference is -2/3π.
前文介绍了通过PTRS序列和DMRS序列相位差隐式功率调整方式的方案,可替代地,上述隐式指示的方法还可以扩展至两个或多个PTRS符号上PTRS序列间的发送信号相位差。相应地,作为一个实施例,该方法还包括:The foregoing describes a scheme of phase difference implicit power adjustment by a PTRS sequence and a DMRS sequence. Alternatively, the implicit indication method may be extended to a phase difference of a transmission signal between PTRS sequences on two or more PTRS symbols. Correspondingly, as an embodiment, the method further includes:
该网络设备通过该第一资源单位中的多个符号发送PTRS序列,其中该多个符号包括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,该第一符号集合上该PTRS序列的相位差与该第二符号集合上的该PTRS序列的相位差用于指示该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends a PTRS sequence by using a plurality of symbols in the first resource unit, where the plurality of symbols includes a first symbol set and a second symbol set, a phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set and the second The phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the symbol set is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
例如,所有符号上PTRS的序列相位完全相同表示求模调整功率;或,For example, the sequence phase of PTRS on all symbols is exactly the same, indicating modulo adjustment power; or,
奇数符号上PTRS的序列相位与偶数符号上的PTRS序列相位差为180°表示功率回退调整功率;或,The phase difference between the sequence phase of the PTRS on the odd symbol and the PTRS sequence on the even symbol is 180°, indicating power back adjustment power; or
相位差为2/3π指示非线性预编码,并求模调整功率;或,A phase difference of 2/3π indicates nonlinear precoding and modulo power adjustment; or
奇数符号上PTRS的序列相位与偶数符号上的PTRS序列相位差为-2/3π指示非线性预编码,并功率回退调整功率;其中奇数和偶数还可以替换成前n个和后m个,即前n个PTRS符号上的PTRS序列与后m个PTRS符号上的PTRS相位表示不同的信息。The phase difference between the sequence phase of the PTRS on the odd symbol and the PTRS sequence on the even symbol is -2/3π indicating nonlinear precoding, and the power back is adjusted to adjust the power; wherein the odd and even numbers can also be replaced by the first n and the last m. That is, the PTRS sequence on the first n PTRS symbols and the PTRS phase on the last m PTRS symbols represent different information.
前文介绍了通过PTRS序列和DMRS序列相位差,或者,两个或多个PTRS符号上PTRS序列间的相位差指示定功率调整方式的方案。由于本申请实施例中利用求模引入的功率损失在不同的调制方式下不同,具体为调制方式越高,求模引入的功率损失约低。因此,可替代地,本申请实施例可依据终端设备的调制方式选择功率调整方式。The foregoing describes a scheme in which a phase difference between a PTRS sequence and a DMRS sequence is used, or a phase difference between PTRS sequences on two or more PTRS symbols indicates a constant power adjustment mode. Since the power loss introduced by using the modulo in the embodiment of the present application is different in different modulation modes, specifically, the higher the modulation mode, the power loss introduced by the modulo is about low. Therefore, the power adjustment mode may be selected according to the modulation mode of the terminal device.
相应地,作为另一实施例,该方法还包括:Correspondingly, as another embodiment, the method further includes:
该网络设备向该第一终端设备发送第四指示信息,该第四指示信息用于指示该第一终端设备对应的调制编码方式MCS,其中,该MCS用于指示该网络设备通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends a fourth indication information to the first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the first terminal device, where the MCS is used to indicate that the network device passes the first resource. The power adjustment mode when the unit transmits data to the first terminal device.
例如,MCS与功率调整方式的对应关系如下:For example, the correspondence between MCS and power adjustment mode is as follows:
高阶调制方式:求模,如调制方式为16QAM或16QAM以上,或调制阶数大于等于m时求模,其中m的值可以为4,6,…。High-order modulation mode: modulo, if the modulation mode is 16QAM or above, or when the modulation order is greater than or equal to m, the value of m can be 4, 6, ....
低阶调制方式:功率回退,如调制方式为QPSK或QPSK以下,或调制阶数小于m时功率回退,其中m的值可以为4,6,…。Low-order modulation mode: power back-off, if the modulation mode is below QPSK or QPSK, or the power is backed off when the modulation order is less than m, where the value of m can be 4, 6, ....
本申请实施例通过隐式的方式指示功率调整方式,因此,网络设备无需额外通过信令指示该功率调整方式,能够节省信令开销。The power adjustment mode is indicated in an implicit manner in the embodiment of the present application. Therefore, the network device does not need to additionally indicate the power adjustment mode by signaling, which can save signaling overhead.
应理解,上述指示预编码方式及功率调整方式的例子仅仅是为了帮助本领域技术人员理解本申请实施例,而非要将本申请实施例限于所例示的具体数值或具体场景。本领域技术人员根据所给出的例子,显然可以进行各种等价的修改或变化,这样的修改或变化也落入本申请实施例的范围内。It should be understood that the foregoing examples of indicating the pre-coding mode and the power-adjusting mode are only for the purpose of facilitating the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to the specific numerical values or specific scenarios illustrated. A person skilled in the art will be able to make various modifications and changes in the embodiments according to the examples given, and such modifications or variations are also within the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
需注意的是,在一些实现方式中,本申请实施例中网络设备需要将两种信息,即预编码方式以及功率调整方式指示(可以是隐式指示也可以是显式指示)给终端设备,上文描述的各种指示方法可以任意组合使用,例如,作为示例而非限定,本申请实施例可以采用以下任意一种组合的方案指示预编码方式和功率调整方式:It should be noted that, in some implementation manners, the network device in the embodiment of the present application needs to send two types of information, that is, a precoding method and a power adjustment mode indication (which may be an implicit indication or an explicit indication) to the terminal device. The various indication methods described above may be used in any combination, for example, by way of example and not limitation, the embodiment of the present application may indicate the precoding mode and the power adjustment mode by using any combination of the following:
显式的方法通知预编码方式,隐式的方法通知功率调整方式,其中隐式的方法可以任意选择上述所列举的任意一种或多种隐式指示方案的组合。The explicit method notifies the precoding method, and the implicit method notifies the power adjustment mode, wherein the implicit method can arbitrarily select a combination of any one or more of the implicit indication schemes listed above.
隐式的方法通知预编码方式,其中隐式的方法可以选则上述所列举的任意一种或多种隐式指示方案的组合,显式的方法通知功率调整方式。The implicit method notifies the precoding method, wherein the implicit method may select a combination of any one or more of the implicit indication schemes listed above, and the explicit method notifies the power adjustment mode.
隐式的方法通知预编码方式,隐式的方法通知功率调整方式,其中二者具体的指示 方法可以联合,如对应序列发送信号相位差的取值范围包含于(-π/3,π/3)时的场景,也可以分开用不同的方法,如预编码方式用DMRS序列与PTRS序列发送信号间的相位差或PTRS序列在不同符号上的发送信号的相位差指示,功率调整方式用调制阶数隐式指示等,本申请实施例并不限于此。The implicit method notifies the precoding mode, and the implicit method notifies the power adjustment mode, wherein the specific indication methods of the two can be combined, for example, the value range of the phase difference of the corresponding sequence transmission signal is included in (-π/3, π/3). The time scenario can also be separated by different methods, such as precoding, using the phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence to transmit the signal or the phase difference indication of the PTRS sequence on the different symbols. The number of implicit indications and the like, the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
应注意,在本申请实施例中,当预编码方式和功率调整方式独立指示时,预编码方式指示的优先级更高,即功率调整方式只有在预编码方式为非线性预编码方式时有效,否则无效。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, when the precoding mode and the power adjustment mode are independently indicated, the precoding mode indicates a higher priority, that is, the power adjustment mode is effective only when the precoding mode is a nonlinear precoding mode. Otherwise invalid.
应理解,前文描述的本申请实施例中描述了全带宽中包括多个资源单位,并可以通过隐式的方式指示网络设备通过资源单位发送数据时的预编码方式和/或功率调整方式。可选地,该隐式指示的方法同样可以扩展至全带宽,也就是说,在网络设备在确定通过全带宽发送数据时的预编码方式和/或功率调整方式后,可以采用上文中隐式指示预编码方式和/功率调整方式的方案,具体可以参见上文中的描述,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the foregoing description of the application in the present application describes a plurality of resource units in the full bandwidth, and may indicate, in an implicit manner, a precoding mode and/or a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data through the resource unit. Optionally, the implicit indication method may also be extended to full bandwidth, that is, after the network device determines the precoding mode and/or the power adjustment mode when transmitting data through the full bandwidth, the above implicit mode may be adopted. For the schemes of the precoding mode and/or the power adjustment mode, refer to the description above, and details are not described herein again.
330,网络设备使用该第一终端设备对应的第一预编码方式通过该第一资源单位向该第一终端设备发送数据。The network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit in a first precoding manner corresponding to the first terminal device.
相对应地,终端设备接收网络设备发送的数据。Correspondingly, the terminal device receives data transmitted by the network device.
340,终端设备根据对应的预编码方式处理接收数据。340. The terminal device processes the received data according to a corresponding precoding manner.
具体而言,网络设备可以按照上文描述的方案指示(可以是隐式指示也可以是显式指示)预编码方式,终端设备根据网络设备的指示确定其对应的预编码方式,并按照该预编码方式解调数据。可选的,在非线性预编码方式下,终端设备还需要根据网络设备的指示(可以是隐式指示或显式指示)确定功率调整方式,并根据确定的预编码方式和功率调整方式解调数据。Specifically, the network device may indicate the precoding mode according to the scheme described above (which may be an implicit indication or an explicit indication), and the terminal device determines its corresponding precoding mode according to the indication of the network device, and according to the pre The encoding method demodulates the data. Optionally, in the non-linear precoding mode, the terminal device further needs to determine a power adjustment mode according to an indication of the network device (which may be an implicit indication or an explicit indication), and demodulate according to the determined precoding mode and power adjustment mode. data.
具体而言,网络设备和终端设备首先需要确定资源单位的大小,之后,网络设备需要获取各个资源单位中每个资源单位上多个终端设备对应的多个信道相关性,并根据各个资源单位上的多个信道相关性值确定在各个资源单位上通信的终端设备对应的预编码方式,并基于各个资源单位上通信的终端设备对应的预编码方式定功率调整方式,并且网络设备需要指示各个终端设备在其调度带宽上的各个资源单位对应的预编码方式和功率调整方式。网络设备基于各个资源单位上通信的终端设备对应的预编码方式和功率调整方式在各个资源单位上发送数据。相应的,各个终端设备根据网络设备的指示,确定其在调度带宽中的各个资源单位对应的预编码方式和功率调整方式,并根据其在调度带宽中的各个资源单位对应的预编码方式和功率调整方式解调数据。Specifically, the network device and the terminal device first need to determine the size of the resource unit, and then the network device needs to obtain multiple channel correlations corresponding to multiple terminal devices in each resource unit in each resource unit, and according to each resource unit. The plurality of channel correlation values determine a precoding manner corresponding to the terminal device that communicates on each resource unit, and determine a power adjustment mode based on a precoding method corresponding to the terminal device that communicates on each resource unit, and the network device needs to indicate each terminal. The precoding mode and power adjustment mode corresponding to each resource unit of the device on its scheduling bandwidth. The network device transmits data on each resource unit based on a precoding method and a power adjustment manner corresponding to the terminal device communicating on each resource unit. Correspondingly, each terminal device determines a precoding mode and a power adjustment mode corresponding to each resource unit in the scheduling bandwidth according to the indication of the network device, and according to the precoding mode and power corresponding to each resource unit in the scheduling bandwidth. The adjustment method demodulates the data.
因此,本申请实施例中网络设备以资源单位为粒度确定预编码方式,避免了现有技术中终端设备在全带宽上确定一种预编码方式的缺点。因此,本申请实施例通过终端设备在不同资源单位上的信道相关性,确定终端设备在各个资源单位上对应的预编码方式,能够提升系统性能。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the network device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity, which avoids the disadvantage that the terminal device determines a precoding mode on the full bandwidth in the prior art. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit by using the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution sequence, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be applied to the embodiment of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
应理解,上文中描述了利用DMRS序列与PTRS序列之间的相位差,或利用不同符号上PTRS序列间的相位差隐式指示各终端设备对应的预编码方式和/或功率调整方式。但本 申请实施例并不限于此,在实际应用中,通过序列的相位差还可用于指示其他信息。具体地,若指示的信息比较少时,例如,1比特或者2比特,则可以采用与前文相同的方法指示该其他信息;若指示的信息大于2比特,则可以用多组连续的PTRS符号相位差表示不同的信息,如每组包含2个或2个以上相邻的有RS的符号,其中RS可以是DMRS和PTRS,也可以是只有PTRS,每组PTRS符号上PTRS序列间相位差均可以表示1~2比特信息。It should be understood that the above describes the use of the phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence, or implicitly indicates the precoding mode and/or power adjustment mode corresponding to each terminal device by using the phase difference between the PTRS sequences on different symbols. However, the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto, and in practical applications, the phase difference by the sequence can also be used to indicate other information. Specifically, if the indicated information is relatively small, for example, 1 bit or 2 bits, the other information may be indicated by the same method as before; if the indicated information is greater than 2 bits, multiple consecutive PTRS symbol phase differences may be used. Indicates different information, such as each group contains 2 or more adjacent RS-signed symbols, where RS can be DMRS and PTRS, or only PTRS, and the phase difference between PTRS sequences on each group of PTRS symbols can be represented. 1 to 2 bits of information.
应理解,上文中图1至图4的例子,仅仅是为了帮助本领域技术人员理解本申请实施例,而非要将本申请实施例限于所例示的具体数值或具体场景。本领域技术人员根据所给出的图1至图4的例子,显然可以进行各种等价的修改或变化,这样的修改或变化也落入本申请实施例的范围内。It should be understood that the above examples of FIG. 1 to FIG. 4 are only for facilitating the understanding of the embodiments of the present application, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to the specific numerical values or specific scenarios illustrated. A person skilled in the art will be able to make various modifications and changes in the embodiments according to the examples of FIG. 1 to FIG. 4, and such modifications or variations are also within the scope of the embodiments of the present application.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution sequence, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be applied to the embodiment of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
上文中,结合图1至图4详细描述了本申请实施例的数据传输的方法,下面结合图5至图8描述本申请实施例的通信装置。The communication device of the embodiment of the present application is described in detail below with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG.
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图,该装置500可包括:FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communications apparatus according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The apparatus 500 may include:
处理单元510和收发单元520。Processing unit 510 and transceiver unit 520.
具体的,所述处理单元用于确定多个终端设备在第一资源单位上的多个信道相关性值,其中,所述多个终端设备包括使用所述第一资源单位通信的设备,所述多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示所述多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度;Specifically, the processing unit is configured to determine a plurality of channel correlation values of the plurality of terminal devices on the first resource unit, where the multiple terminal devices include devices that use the first resource unit to communicate, Each of the plurality of channel correlation values represents a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices;
根据所述多个信道相关性值,确定所述多个终端设备中的每个终端设备对应的预编码方式,其中,第一终端设备对应第一预编码方式,所述第一终端设备为所述多个终端设备中的任意一个;And determining, according to the multiple channel correlation values, a precoding mode corresponding to each of the plurality of terminal devices, where the first terminal device corresponds to the first precoding mode, and the first terminal device is Describe any one of a plurality of terminal devices;
所述收发单元用于使用所述第一终端设备对应的第一预编码方式通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据。The transceiver unit is configured to send data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit in a first precoding manner corresponding to the first terminal device.
本申请实施例中通信装置以资源单位为粒度确定预编码方式,同一个终端设备在不同的资源单位上对应的预编码方式可能不同,避免了现有技术中终端设备在全带宽上确定一种预编码方式的缺点。因此,本申请实施例通过终端设备在不同资源单位上的信道相关性,确定终端设备在各个资源单位上对应的预编码方式,能够提升系统性能。In the embodiment of the present application, the communication device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity. The precoding mode corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the terminal device in the prior art is determined to determine a full bandwidth. The shortcomings of the precoding method. Therefore, the embodiment of the present application determines the precoding mode corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit by using the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
可选地,所述处理单元还用于确定所述第一资源单位的大小;Optionally, the processing unit is further configured to determine a size of the first resource unit;
所述收发单元还用于向所述第一终端设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一资源单位的大小。The transceiver unit is further configured to send the first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a size of the first resource unit.
可选地,所述处理单元具体用于:Optionally, the processing unit is specifically configured to:
根据每两个终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性的波动程度确定所述第一资源单位的大小,或Determining the size of the first resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of channel correlation of the total bandwidth of each two terminal devices, or
根据终端设备的调度带宽的大小确定所述第一资源单位的大小,或Determining the size of the first resource unit according to a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, or
根据终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔的大小确定所述第一资源单位的大小,或Determining the size of the first resource unit according to a size of a subcarrier interval in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, or
从预设的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为所述第一资源单位的大小。One of the preset values of the plurality of resource unit sizes is selected as the size of the first resource unit.
可选地,所述处理单元具体用于根据所述终端设备间信道相关性的波动程度、终端设备的调度带宽的大小、终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔的大小中的至少一种,从预设 的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为所述第一资源单位的大小。Optionally, the processing unit is specifically configured to: according to at least one of a degree of fluctuation of channel correlation between the terminal devices, a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a size of a subcarrier interval in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, One of the preset values of the plurality of resource unit sizes is selected as the size of the first resource unit.
可选地,所述处理单元还用于根据预设参数确定所述第一资源单位的大小,所述预设参数包括终端设备的调度带宽的大小、终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔。Optionally, the processing unit is further configured to determine a size of the first resource unit according to a preset parameter, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device.
可选地,所述收发元还用于向所述第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码方式。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further configured to send second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
可选地,所述第二指示信息为位图的形式,所述第二指示信息的比特数与所述第一终端设备的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,所述第二指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的预编码方式。Optionally, the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device, where the second Each bit in the indication information is used to indicate a precoding manner corresponding to one resource unit.
可选地,所述收发单元还用于通过所述第一资源单位发送解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列,所述DMRS序列和所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述第一终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式,和/或,所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further configured to send, by using the first resource unit, a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence, where a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate the a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates with the first resource unit, and/or a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
可选地,所述收发单元还用于通过所述第一资源单位中的多个符号发送PTRS序列,其中所述多个符号包括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,所述第一符号集合上所述PTRS序列的相位差与所述第二符号集合上的所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述第一终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式,和/或,所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further configured to send a PTRS sequence by using multiple symbols in the first resource unit, where the multiple symbols include a first symbol set and a second symbol set, the first symbol set And a phase difference between the phase difference of the PTRS sequence and the PTRS sequence on the second symbol set is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit, and/or And a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
可选地,所述第一终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式为非线性预编码方式,所述处理单元还用于确定通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式;Optionally, the precoding mode when the first terminal device communicates by using the first resource unit is a non-linear precoding mode, and the processing unit is further configured to determine, by using the first resource unit, the first The power adjustment mode when the terminal device sends data;
所述收发单元还用于向所述第一终端设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The transceiver unit is further configured to send third indication information to the first terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit. Power adjustment method.
可选地,所述第三指示信息为位图的形式,所述第三指示信息的比特数与所述第一终端设备的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,所述第三指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的功率调整方式。Optionally, the third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the third indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the first terminal device, where the third Each bit in the indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment mode corresponding to one resource unit.
可选地,所述收发单元还用于向所述第一终端设备发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备对应的调制编码方式MCS,其中,所述MCS用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further configured to send fourth indication information to the first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the first terminal device, where the The MCS is configured to indicate a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
本申请提供的通信装置是对应上述图3方法实施例中网络设备执行的过程,该通信装置中的各个单元/模块的功能可以参见上文中的描述,此处不再赘述The communication device provided by the present application is a process performed by the network device in the foregoing method embodiment of FIG. 3, and the functions of each unit/module in the communication device can be referred to the description above, and details are not described herein again.
因此,本申请实施例通过终端设备在不同资源单位上的信道相关性,确定终端设备在各个资源单位上对应的预编码方式,同一个终端设备在不同的资源单位上对应的预编码方式可能不同,避免了现有技术中终端设备在全带宽上确定一种预编码方式的缺点,能够提升系统性能。Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the precoding method corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit is determined by the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, and the precoding manner corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different. The shortcomings of the prior art terminal device determining a precoding mode over the entire bandwidth are avoided, and the system performance can be improved.
应理解,图5所述的通信装置可以是网络设备,也可以是安装于网络设备中的芯片或集成电路。It should be understood that the communication device described in FIG. 5 may be a network device or a chip or an integrated circuit installed in the network device.
以通信装置为网络设备为例,图6为本申请实施例提供的一种网络设备的结构示意图,例如可以为基站的结构示意图。如图6所示,该网络设备600可应用于如图1所示的系统 中,执行上述方法实施例中网络设备的功能。Taking a communication device as a network device as an example, FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application, and may be, for example, a schematic structural diagram of a base station. As shown in FIG. 6, the network device 600 can be applied to the system shown in FIG. 1 to perform the functions of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
网络设备600可以包括一个或多个射频单元,如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)61和一个或多个基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)(也可称为数字单元,digital unit,DU)62。所述RRU61可以称为收发单元61,与图5中的收发单元520对应,可选地,该收发单元还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等,其可以包括至少一个天线611和射频单元612。所述RRU61部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换,例如用于向终端设备发送预编码矩阵信息。所述BBU62部分主要用于进行基带处理,对基站进行控制等。所述RRU61与BBU62可以是物理上设置在一起,也可以物理上分离设置的,即分布式基站。The network device 600 may include one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 61 and one or more baseband units (BBUs) (also referred to as digital units, digital units, DUs). ) 62. The RRU 61 may be referred to as a transceiver unit 61, corresponding to the transceiver unit 520 of FIG. 5. Alternatively, the transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., which may include at least one antenna 611. And a radio frequency unit 612. The RRU 61 portion is mainly used for transmitting and receiving radio frequency signals and converting radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for transmitting precoding matrix information to a terminal device. The BBU 62 part is mainly used for performing baseband processing, controlling a base station, and the like. The RRU 61 and the BBU 62 may be physically disposed together or physically separated, that is, distributed base stations.
所述BBU62为基站的控制中心,也可以称为处理单元62,可以与图5中的处理单元510对应,主要用于完成基带处理功能,如信道编码,复用,调制,扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理单元)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。The BBU 62 is a control center of the base station, and may also be referred to as a processing unit 62. It may correspond to the processing unit 510 in FIG. 5, and is mainly used to perform baseband processing functions, such as channel coding, multiplexing, modulation, spreading, and the like. For example, the BBU (processing unit) can be used to control the base station to perform an operation procedure about the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
在一个示例中,所述BBU62可以由一个或多个单板构成,多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网),也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网,5G网或其他网)。所述BBU62还包括存储器621和处理器622。所述存储器621用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器622用于控制基站进行必要的动作,例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器621和处理器622可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说,可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。In an example, the BBU 62 may be composed of one or more boards, and multiple boards may jointly support a single access standard radio access network (such as an LTE network), or may separately support different access technologies. Access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other network). The BBU 62 also includes a memory 621 and a processor 622. The memory 621 is used to store necessary instructions and data. The processor 622 is configured to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, to control the base station to perform an operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment. The memory 621 and the processor 622 can serve one or more boards. That is, the memory and processor can be individually set on each board. It is also possible that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, the necessary circuits can be set on each board.
应理解,图6所示的网络设备600能够实现图3方法实施例中涉及网络设备的各个过程。网络设备600中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。It should be understood that the network device 600 shown in FIG. 6 can implement various processes related to the network device in the method embodiment of FIG. 3. The operations and/or functions of the various modules in the network device 600 are respectively implemented in order to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiments. To avoid repetition, the detailed description is omitted here.
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图,该装置700可包括:FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a communications apparatus according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. The apparatus 700 may include:
处理单元710和收发单元720。Processing unit 710 and transceiver unit 720.
具体地,所述收发单元用于接收网络设备通过所述第一资源单位发送的数据;Specifically, the transceiver unit is configured to receive data sent by the network device by using the first resource unit;
所述处理单元用于使用所述通信装置对应的第一预编码方式解调所述数据,,其中,所述第一预编码方式为所述网络设备根据多个终端设备在第一资源单位上的多个信道相关性值确定的,所述多个终端设备包括使用所述第一资源单位通信的设备,所述多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示所述多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度。The processing unit is configured to demodulate the data by using a first precoding manner corresponding to the communication device, where the first precoding mode is that the network device is in a first resource unit according to multiple terminal devices. Determining, by the plurality of channel correlation values, the plurality of terminal devices including devices communicating using the first resource unit, each channel correlation value of the plurality of channel correlation values representing the plurality of terminals The degree of interference between two terminal devices in the device.
本申请实施例中网络设备以资源单位为粒度确定预编码方式,同一个终端设备在不同的资源单位上对应的预编码方式可能不同,避免了现有技术中终端设备在全带宽上确定一种预编码方式的缺点。因此,本申请实施例终端设备在不同资源单位上使用该资源单位对应的预编码方式解调数据,能够提升系统性能。In the embodiment of the present application, the network device determines the precoding mode by using the resource unit as the granularity. The precoding method corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the terminal device in the prior art is determined to determine a full bandwidth. The shortcomings of the precoding method. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device demodulates data in a precoding manner corresponding to the resource unit on different resource units, thereby improving system performance.
可选地,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一资源单位的大小。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further configured to receive first indication information that is sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a size of the first resource unit.
可选地,所述处理单元还用于根据预设参数确定所述第一资源单位的大小,所述预设参数包括所述终端设备的调度带宽的大小、所述终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔。Optionally, the processing unit is further configured to determine, according to a preset parameter, a size of the first resource unit, where the preset parameter includes a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, and a scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device. Subcarrier spacing.
可选地,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示 信息用于指示所述第一预编码方式。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second indication information that is sent by the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
可选地,所述第二指示信息为位图的形式,所述第二指示信息的比特数与所述通信装置的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,所述第二指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的预编码方式。Optionally, the second indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the second indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the communication device, where the second indication information Each bit in the bit is used to indicate the precoding mode corresponding to one resource unit.
可选地,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位发送的解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列,所述DMRS序列和所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述通信装置使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式,和/或,所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述通信装置发送数据时的功率调整方式。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further configured to receive a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence sent by the network device by using the first resource unit, and the phase of the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence The difference is used to indicate a precoding manner when the communication device communicates using the first resource unit, and/or a power adjustment mode when the network device transmits data to the communication device by using the first resource unit.
可选地,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位中的多个符号发送的PTRS序列,其中所述多个符号包括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,所述第一符号集合上所述PTRS序列的相位差与所述第二符号集合上的所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式,和/或,所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further configured to receive a PTRS sequence that is sent by the network device by using multiple symbols in the first resource unit, where the multiple symbols include a first symbol set and a second symbol set. a phase difference between the phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the first symbol set and the PTRS sequence on the second symbol set is used to indicate a precoding manner when the terminal device communicates using the first resource unit And/or a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
可选地,所述通信装置使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式为非线性预编码方式,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。Optionally, the precoding mode when the communication device uses the first resource unit communication is a non-linear precoding mode, and the transceiver unit is further configured to receive third indication information sent by the network device, where the The three indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
可选地,所述第三指示信息为位图的形式,所述第三指示信息的比特数与所述终端设备的调度带宽中的资源单位的个数相等,其中,所述第三指示信息中的每一个比特用于指示一个资源单位对应的功率调整方式。Optionally, the third indication information is in the form of a bitmap, where the number of bits of the third indication information is equal to the number of resource units in the scheduling bandwidth of the terminal device, where the third indication information is Each bit in the bit is used to indicate the power adjustment mode corresponding to one resource unit.
可选地,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备对应的调制编码方式MCS,其中,所述MCS用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。Optionally, the transceiver unit is further configured to receive fourth indication information that is sent by the network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the terminal device, where the MCS is used to And indicating a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
本申请提供的通信装置700对应上述图3方法实施例中终端设备执行的过程,该通信装置中的各个单元/模块的功能可以参见上文中的描述,此处不再赘述The communication device 700 provided by the present application corresponds to the process performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment of FIG. 3. The function of each unit/module in the communication device can be referred to the description above, and details are not described herein again.
本申请实施例通过终端设备在不同资源单位上的信道相关性,确定终端设备在各个资源单位上对应的预编码方式,同一个终端设备在不同的资源单位上对应的预编码方式可能不同,避免了现有技术中终端设备在全带宽上确定一种预编码方式的缺点,因此,本申请实施例终端设备在不同资源单位上使用该资源单位对应的预编码方式解调数据,能够提升系统性能。In the embodiment of the present application, the precoding method corresponding to the terminal device in each resource unit is determined by the channel correlation of the terminal device on different resource units, and the precoding manner corresponding to the same terminal device on different resource units may be different, and the method may be avoided. In the prior art, the terminal device determines a precoding mode on the full bandwidth. Therefore, the terminal device in the embodiment of the present application uses the precoding method corresponding to the resource unit to demodulate data in different resource units, thereby improving system performance. .
应理解,图7所述的通信装置可以是终端设备,也可以是安装于终端设备中的芯片或集成电路。It should be understood that the communication device described in FIG. 7 may be a terminal device or a chip or an integrated circuit installed in the terminal device.
以通信装置为终端设备为例,图8为本申请实施例提供的一种终端设备的结构示意图,便于理解和图示方便,图8中,终端设备以手机作为例子。图8仅示出了终端设备的主要部件。如图8所示终端设备800包括处理器、存储器、控制电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据,例如用于支持终端设备执行上述方法实施例中所描述的动作。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。控制电路和天线一起也可以叫做收发器,主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的 数据以及对用户输出数据。Taking the communication device as a terminal device as an example, FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application, which is convenient for understanding and illustration. In FIG. 8, the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example. Fig. 8 shows only the main components of the terminal device. The terminal device 800 shown in FIG. 8 includes a processor, a memory, a control circuit, an antenna, and an input/output device. The processor is mainly used for processing the communication protocol and the communication data, and controlling the entire terminal device, executing the software program, and processing the data of the software program, for example, for supporting the terminal device to perform the actions described in the foregoing method embodiments. Memory is primarily used to store software programs and data. The control circuit is mainly used for converting baseband signals and radio frequency signals and processing radio frequency signals. The control circuit together with the antenna can also be called a transceiver, and is mainly used for transmitting and receiving RF signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are primarily used to receive user input data and output data to the user.
当终端设备开机后,处理器可以读取存储单元中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器,处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。After the terminal device is powered on, the processor can read the software program in the storage unit, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When the data needs to be transmitted by wireless, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal, and then sends the radio frequency signal to the outside through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves. When data is transmitted to the terminal device, the RF circuit receives the RF signal through the antenna, converts the RF signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, which converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
本领域技术人员可以理解,为了便于说明,图8仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备中,可以存在多个处理器和存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等,本申请实施例对此不做限制。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that FIG. 8 shows only one memory and processor for ease of illustration. In an actual terminal device, there may be multiple processors and memories. The memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or a storage device, and the like.
作为一种可选的实现方式,处理器可以包括基带处理器和中央处理器,基带处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器主要用于对整个终端设备进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。图8中的处理器可以集成基带处理器和中央处理器的功能,本领域技术人员可以理解,基带处理器和中央处理器也可以是各自独立的处理器,通过总线等技术互联。本领域技术人员可以理解,终端设备可以包括多个基带处理器以适应不同的网络制式,终端设备可以包括多个中央处理器以增强其处理能力,终端设备的各个部件可以通过各种总线连接。所述基带处理器也可以表述为基带处理电路或者基带处理芯片。所述中央处理器也可以表述为中央处理电路或者中央处理芯片。对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理的功能可以内置在处理器中,也可以以软件程序的形式存储在存储单元中,由处理器执行软件程序以实现基带处理功能。As an optional implementation manner, the processor may include a baseband processor and a central processing unit, and the baseband processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and the communication data, and the central processing unit is mainly used to control and execute the entire terminal device. A software program that processes data from a software program. The processor in FIG. 8 can integrate the functions of the baseband processor and the central processing unit. Those skilled in the art can understand that the baseband processor and the central processing unit can also be independent processors and interconnected by technologies such as a bus. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the terminal device may include a plurality of baseband processors to accommodate different network standards, and the terminal device may include a plurality of central processors to enhance its processing capabilities, and various components of the terminal devices may be connected through various buses. The baseband processor can also be expressed as a baseband processing circuit or a baseband processing chip. The central processing unit can also be expressed as a central processing circuit or a central processing chip. The functions of processing the communication protocol and the communication data may be built in the processor, or may be stored in the storage unit in the form of a software program, and the processor executes the software program to implement the baseband processing function.
在发明实施例中,可以将具有收发功能的天线和控制电路视为终端设备800的收发单元81,例如,用于支持终端设备执行如图3中方法实施中终端设备执行的收发功能。将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备800的处理单元82,其与图7中的处理单元710对应。如图8所示,终端设备800包括收发单元81和处理单元82。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等,该收发单元与图7中的收发单元720对应。可选的,可以将收发单元81中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元,将收发单元81中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元,即收发单元81包括接收单元和发送单元,接收单元也可以称为接收机、输入口、接收电路等,发送单元可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。In the embodiment of the present invention, the antenna and the control circuit having the transceiving function can be regarded as the transceiving unit 81 of the terminal device 800, for example, for supporting the terminal device to perform the transceiving function performed by the terminal device in the method implementation in FIG. The processor having the processing function is regarded as the processing unit 82 of the terminal device 800, which corresponds to the processing unit 710 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the terminal device 800 includes a transceiving unit 81 and a processing unit 82. The transceiver unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiver, etc., and the transceiver unit corresponds to the transceiver unit 720 in FIG. Optionally, the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 81 can be regarded as a receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 81 is regarded as a sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 81 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit. The receiving unit may also be referred to as a receiver, an input port, a receiving circuit, etc., and the transmitting unit may be referred to as a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit or the like.
处理单元82可用于执行该存储器存储的指令,以控制收发单元81接收信号和/或发送信号,完成上述方法实施例中终端设备的功能。作为一种实现方式,收发单元81的功能可以考虑通过收发电路或者收发的专用芯片实现。The processing unit 82 can be configured to execute the instructions stored in the memory to control the transceiver unit 81 to receive signals and/or transmit signals to perform the functions of the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments. As an implementation manner, the function of the transceiver unit 81 can be implemented by a dedicated chip through a transceiver circuit or a transceiver.
应理解,图8所示的终端设备800能够实现图3方法实施例中涉及终端设备的各个过程。终端设备800中的各个模块的操作和/或功能,分别为了实现上述方法实施例中的相应流程。具体可参见上述方法实施例中的描述,为避免重复,此处适当省略详述描述。It should be understood that the terminal device 800 shown in FIG. 8 can implement various processes related to the terminal device in the method embodiment of FIG. 3. The operations and/or functions of the respective modules in the terminal device 800 are respectively implemented in order to implement the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments. For details, refer to the description in the foregoing method embodiments. To avoid repetition, the detailed description is omitted here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口;所述处理器,用于执行上述任一方法实施例中的通信的方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a processing apparatus, including a processor and an interface, and a processor, which is used to perform the communication in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC),还可以是系统芯片(System on Chip,SoC),还可以是中央 处理器(Central Processor Unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(Network Processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(Digital Signal Processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(Micro Controller Unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(Programmable Logic Device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。It should be understood that the above processing device may be a chip. For example, the processing device may be a Field-Programmable Gate Array (FPGA), may be an Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC), or may be a System on Chip (SoC). It can be a Central Processor Unit (CPU), a Network Processor (NP), a Digital Signal Processor (DSP), or a Micro Controller (Micro Controller). Unit, MCU), can also be a Programmable Logic Device (PLD) or other integrated chip.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in a form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and combines the hardware to complete the steps of the above method. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated crcuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成,或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。It should be noted that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the foregoing method embodiment may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in a processor or an instruction in a form of software. The above processor may be a general purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated crucit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA) or the like. Programming logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components. The methods, steps, and logical block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed. The general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by the hardware decoding processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software module can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and combines the hardware to complete the steps of the above method.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的RAM可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM,DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It is to be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read only memory (ROMM), an erasable programmable read only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), or an electrical Erase programmable EPROM (EEPROM) or flash memory. The volatile memory can be a random access memory (RAM) that acts as an external cache. By way of example and not limitation, many forms of RAM are available, such as static random access memory (SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (Synchronous DRAM). SDRAM), double data rate synchronous DRAM (DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (ESDRAM), synchronously connected dynamic random access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) ) and direct memory bus random access memory (DR RAM). It should be noted that the memories of the systems and methods described herein are intended to comprise, without being limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统,其包括前述的网络设备和终端设备。The embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, which includes the foregoing network device and terminal device.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读介质,其上存储有计算机程序,该计算机程序被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例中的通信的方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer readable medium having stored thereon a computer program, the method of implementing the communication in any of the foregoing method embodiments when the computer program is executed by a computer.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例中的通信的方法。The embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, which is implemented by a computer to implement the method of communication in any of the foregoing method embodiments.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center via wired (eg coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (eg infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a high-density digital video disc (DVD)), or a semiconductor medium (eg, a solid state disk, SSD)) and so on.
应理解,上文中描述了通信系统中下行传输时通信的方法,但本申请并不限于此,可选地,在上行传输时也可以采用上文类似的方案,为避免重复,此处不再赘述。It should be understood that the method for communication in the downlink transmission in the communication system is described above, but the application is not limited thereto. Alternatively, the above similar scheme may also be adopted in the uplink transmission. Narration.
应理解,说明书通篇中提到的“一个实施例”或“一实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此,在整个说明书各处出现的“在一个实施例中”或“在一实施例中”未必一定指相同的实施例。此外,这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It is to be understood that the phrase "one embodiment" or "an embodiment" or "an embodiment" or "an embodiment" means that the particular features, structures, or characteristics relating to the embodiments are included in at least one embodiment of the present application. Thus, "in one embodiment" or "in an embodiment" or "an" In addition, these particular features, structures, or characteristics may be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. It should be understood that, in the various embodiments of the present application, the size of the sequence numbers of the foregoing processes does not mean the order of execution sequence, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be applied to the embodiment of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component," "module," "system," and the like, as used in this specification, are used to mean a computer-related entity, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, a component can be, but is not limited to being, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer. By way of illustration, both an application running on a computing device and a computing device can be a component. One or more components can reside within a process and/or execution thread, and the components can be located on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers. Moreover, these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. A component may, for example, be based on signals having one or more data packets (eg, data from two components interacting with another component between the local system, the distributed system, and/or the network, such as the Internet interacting with other systems) Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
还应理解,本文中涉及的第一、第二、第三、第四以及各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围。It is also to be understood that the first, second, third, fourth, and various reference numerals are in the
应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。It should be understood that the term "and/or" herein is merely an association relationship describing an associated object, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which may indicate that A exists separately, and A and B exist simultaneously. There are three cases of B alone.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step),能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的 功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the various illustrative logical blocks and steps described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. achieve. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functionality for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。A person skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, the specific working process of the system, the device and the unit described above can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided by the present application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令(程序)。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令(程序)时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘solid state disk(SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions (programs). When the computer program instructions (programs) are loaded and executed on a computer, the processes or functions described in accordance with embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer readable storage medium or transferred from one computer readable storage medium to another computer readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions can be from a website site, computer, server or data center Transfer to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, fiber optic, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer readable storage medium can be any available media that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, or the like that includes one or more available media. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (eg, a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (eg, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (eg, a solid state disk (SSD)) or the like.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The foregoing is only a specific embodiment of the present application, but the scope of protection of the present application is not limited thereto, and any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the present application. It should be covered by the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the scope of protection of the present application should be determined by the scope of the claims.

Claims (32)

  1. 一种数据传输的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for data transmission, comprising:
    网络设备确定多个终端设备在第一资源单位上的多个信道相关性值,其中,所述多个终端设备包括使用所述第一资源单位通信的设备,所述多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示所述多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度;The network device determines a plurality of channel correlation values of the plurality of terminal devices on the first resource unit, wherein the plurality of terminal devices comprise devices that communicate using the first resource unit, wherein the plurality of channel correlation values are Each channel correlation value represents a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices;
    所述网络设备根据所述多个信道相关性值,确定所述多个终端设备中的每个终端设备对应的预编码方式,其中,第一终端设备对应第一预编码方式,所述第一终端设备为所述多个终端设备中的任意一个;Determining, by the network device, a precoding mode corresponding to each of the plurality of terminal devices according to the multiple channel correlation values, where the first terminal device corresponds to the first precoding mode, and the first The terminal device is any one of the plurality of terminal devices;
    所述网络设备使用所述第一终端设备对应的第一预编码方式通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据。The network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit in a first precoding manner corresponding to the first terminal device.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 1 further comprising:
    所述网络设备确定所述第一资源单位的大小;Determining, by the network device, a size of the first resource unit;
    所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一资源单位的大小。The network device sends first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a size of the first resource unit.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络设备确定所述第一资源单位的大小,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining, by the network device, the size of the first resource unit comprises:
    所述网络设备根据每两个终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性的波动程度确定所述第一资源单位的大小,或Determining, by the network device, a size of the first resource unit according to a degree of fluctuation of channel correlation of each two terminal devices over a full bandwidth, or
    所述网络设备根据所述多个终端设备的调度带宽的大小确定所述第一资源单位的大小,或Determining, by the network device, a size of the first resource unit according to a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices, or
    所述网络设备根据所述多个终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔的大小确定所述第一资源单位的大小,或Determining, by the network device, a size of the first resource unit according to a size of a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices, or
    所述网络设备从预设的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为所述第一资源单位的大小。The network device selects one of the preset multiple resource unit size values as the size of the first resource unit.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising:
    所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码方式。The network device sends second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
  5. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising:
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位发送解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列,所述DMRS序列和所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述第一终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式;和/或,Transmitting, by the network device, a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence by using the first resource unit, where a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate that the first terminal device uses the The precoding method when the first resource unit communicates; and/or,
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  6. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising:
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位中的多个符号发送PTRS序列,其中所述多个符号包括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,所述第一符号集合上所述PTRS序列与所述第二符号集合上的所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述第一终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通 信时的预编码方式;和/或,Transmitting, by the network device, a PTRS sequence by using a plurality of symbols in the first resource unit, where the multiple symbols comprise a first symbol set and a second symbol set, where the PTRS sequence and the first symbol set are a phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the second set of symbols is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit; and/or,
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  7. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising:
    所述网络设备确定通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式;Determining, by the network device, a power adjustment manner when the first resource unit sends data to the first terminal device;
    所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends third indication information to the first terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate power adjustment when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit. the way.
  8. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising:
    所述网络设备向所述第一终端设备发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备对应的调制编码方式MCS,其中,所述MCS用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The network device sends fourth indication information to the first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the first terminal device, where the MCS is used to indicate the network A power adjustment mode when the device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  9. 一种数据传输的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for data transmission, comprising:
    终端设备接收网络设备通过所述第一资源单位发送的数据;Receiving, by the terminal device, data sent by the network device by using the first resource unit;
    所述终端设备使用所述终端设备对应的第一预编码方式解调所述数据,其中,所述第一预编码方式为所述网络设备根据多个终端设备在第一资源单位上的多个信道相关性值确定的,所述多个终端设备包括使用所述第一资源单位通信的设备,所述多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示所述多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度。The terminal device demodulates the data by using a first precoding manner corresponding to the terminal device, where the first precoding mode is that the network device is multiple according to multiple terminal devices on a first resource unit. Determining, by the channel correlation value, the plurality of terminal devices includes a device that communicates using the first resource unit, each of the plurality of channel correlation values representing a plurality of the terminal devices The degree of interference between two terminal devices.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 9 wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一资源单位的大小。The terminal device receives the first indication information that is sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a size of the first resource unit.
  11. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码方式。The terminal device receives the second indication information that is sent by the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding mode.
  12. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位发送的解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列,所述DMRS序列和所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式;和/或,Receiving, by the terminal device, a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence sent by the network device by using the first resource unit, where a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate the terminal a precoding method when the device communicates using the first resource unit; and/or,
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  13. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位中的多个符号发送的PTRS序列,其中所述多个符号包括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,所述第一符号集合上所述PTRS序列的相位差与所述第二符号集合上的所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式;和/或,Receiving, by the terminal device, a PTRS sequence that is sent by the network device by using multiple symbols in the first resource unit, where the multiple symbols include a first symbol set and a second symbol set, where the first symbol set is a phase difference between a phase difference of the PTRS sequence and the PTRS sequence on the second symbol set is used to indicate a precoding manner when the terminal device communicates using the first resource unit; and/or,
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  14. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The terminal device receives the third indication information that is sent by the network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate a power adjustment manner when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  15. 根据权利要求9或10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 9 or 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述终端设备接收所述网络设备发送的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备对应的调制编码方式MCS,其中,所述MCS用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The terminal device receives the fourth indication information that is sent by the network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the terminal device, where the MCS is used to indicate that the network device passes the A power adjustment mode when the first resource unit transmits data to the terminal device.
  16. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    处理单元,用于确定多个终端设备在第一资源单位上的多个信道相关性值,其中,所述多个终端设备包括使用所述第一资源单位通信的设备,所述多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示所述多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度;a processing unit, configured to determine a plurality of channel correlation values of the plurality of terminal devices on the first resource unit, where the multiple terminal devices include devices that use the first resource unit to communicate, the multiple channels are related Each of the channel correlation values represents a degree of interference between two of the plurality of terminal devices;
    根据所述多个信道相关性值,确定所述多个终端设备中的每个终端设备对应的预编码方式,其中,第一终端设备对应第一预编码方式,所述第一终端设备为所述多个终端设备中的任意一个;And determining, according to the multiple channel correlation values, a precoding mode corresponding to each of the plurality of terminal devices, where the first terminal device corresponds to the first precoding mode, and the first terminal device is Describe any one of a plurality of terminal devices;
    收发单元,用于使用所述第一终端设备对应的第一预编码方式通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据。The transceiver unit is configured to send data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit in a first precoding manner corresponding to the first terminal device.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于确定所述第一资源单位的大小;The communication device according to claim 16, wherein the processing unit is further configured to determine a size of the first resource unit;
    所述收发单元还用于向所述第一终端设备发送第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一资源单位的大小。The transceiver unit is further configured to send the first indication information to the first terminal device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a size of the first resource unit.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元具体用于:The communication device according to claim 17, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    根据每两个终端设备在全带宽上的信道相关性的波动程度确定所述第一资源单位的大小,或Determining the size of the first resource unit according to the degree of fluctuation of channel correlation of the total bandwidth of each two terminal devices, or
    根据所述多个终端设备的调度带宽的大小确定所述第一资源单位的大小,或Determining a size of the first resource unit according to a size of a scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices, or
    根据所述多个终端设备的调度带宽中的子载波间隔的大小确定所述第一资源单位的大小,或Determining a size of the first resource unit according to a size of a subcarrier spacing in a scheduling bandwidth of the multiple terminal devices, or
    从预设的多个资源单位大小取值中选取其中一个取值作为所述第一资源单位的大小。One of the preset values of the plurality of resource unit sizes is selected as the size of the first resource unit.
  19. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发元还用于向所述第一终端设备发送第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码方式。The communication device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send second indication information to the first terminal device, where the second indication information is used to indicate The first precoding method is described.
  20. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于通过所述第一资源单位发送解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列,所述DMRS序列和所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述第一终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式;和/或,The communication device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence by using the first resource unit, a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate a precoding manner when the first terminal device communicates using the first resource unit; and/or,
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  21. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于通过所述第一资源单位中的多个符号发送PTRS序列,其中所述多个符号包括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,所述第一符号集合上所述PTRS序列的相位差与所述第二符号集合上的所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述第一终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式;和/或,The communication device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send a PTRS sequence by using a plurality of symbols in the first resource unit, wherein the plurality of symbols comprise a first set of symbols and a second set of symbols, wherein a phase difference between the phase difference of the PTRS sequence on the first set of symbols and the PTRS sequence on the second set of symbols is used to indicate use by the first terminal device a precoding method when the first resource unit communicates; and/or,
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  22. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元还用于确定通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式;The communication device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the processing unit is further configured to determine a power adjustment mode when the first resource unit transmits data to the first terminal device;
    所述收发单元还用于向所述第一终端设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The transceiver unit is further configured to send third indication information to the first terminal device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit. Power adjustment method.
  23. 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于向所述第一终端设备发送第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一终端设备对应的调制编码方式MCS,其中,所述MCS用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述第一终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The communication device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to send fourth indication information to the first terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate The modulation and coding mode MCS corresponding to the first terminal device, where the MCS is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the first terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  24. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    收发单元,用于接收网络设备通过所述第一资源单位发送的数据;a transceiver unit, configured to receive data sent by the network device by using the first resource unit;
    处理单元,用于使用所述通信装置对应的第一预编码方式解调所述数据,其中,所述第一预编码方式为所述网络设备根据多个终端设备在第一资源单位上的多个信道相关性值确定的,所述多个终端设备包括使用所述第一资源单位通信的设备,所述多个信道相关性值中的每一个信道相关性值表示所述多个终端设备中的两个终端设备之间的干扰程度。a processing unit, configured to demodulate the data by using a first precoding manner corresponding to the communication device, where the first precoding manner is that the network device is configured according to a plurality of terminal devices on a first resource unit. Determined by the channel correlation values, the plurality of terminal devices including devices that communicate using the first resource unit, each of the plurality of channel correlation values representing the plurality of terminal devices The degree of interference between the two terminal devices.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一资源单位的大小。The communication device according to claim 24, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive first indication information sent by the network device, where the first indication information is used to indicate a size of the first resource unit .
  26. 根据权利要求24或25所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一预编码方式。The communication device according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive second indication information sent by the network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate the first precoding the way.
  27. 根据权利要求24或25所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位发送的解调参考信号DMRS序列和相位跟踪参考信号PTRS序列,所述DMRS序列和所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述通信装置使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式;和/或,The communication device according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive a demodulation reference signal DMRS sequence and a phase tracking reference signal PTRS sequence sent by the network device by using the first resource unit. And a phase difference between the DMRS sequence and the PTRS sequence is used to indicate a precoding manner when the communication device communicates using the first resource unit; and/or,
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述通信装置发送数据时的功率调整方式。a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the communication device by using the first resource unit.
  28. 根据权利要求24或25所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位中的多个符号发送的PTRS序列,其中所述多个符号包括第一符号集合和第二符号集合,所述第一符号集合上所述PTRS序列的相位差与所述第二符号集合上的所述PTRS序列的相位差用于指示所述终端设备使用所述第一资源单位通信时的预编码方式;和/或,The communication device according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive a PTRS sequence sent by the network device by using a plurality of symbols in the first resource unit, where the multiple The symbol includes a first symbol set and a second symbol set, a phase difference between the phase difference of the PTRS sequence and the PTRS sequence on the second symbol set on the first symbol set is used to indicate use by the terminal device a precoding method when the first resource unit communicates; and/or,
    所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  29. 根据权利要求24或25所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The communication device according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive third indication information that is sent by the network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the network device passes the A power adjustment mode when the first resource unit transmits data to the terminal device.
  30. 根据权利要求24或25所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于接收所述网络设备发送的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示所述终端设备对应的调制编码方式MCS,其中,所述MCS用于指示所述网络设备通过所述第一资源单位向所述终端设备发送数据时的功率调整方式。The communication device according to claim 24 or 25, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to receive fourth indication information that is sent by the network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device corresponds to The modulation coding mode MCS, wherein the MCS is used to indicate a power adjustment mode when the network device sends data to the terminal device by using the first resource unit.
  31. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1至15中任一项所述的方法。A computer readable storage medium, comprising a computer program, when the computer program is run on a computer, causing the computer to perform the method of any one of claims 1 to 15.
  32. 一种系统,其特征在于,包括权利要求16至23中任一项所述的通信装置和权利要求24至30中任一项所述的通信装置。A system comprising the communication device according to any one of claims 16 to 23 and the communication device according to any one of claims 24 to 30.
PCT/CN2019/081769 2018-04-10 2019-04-08 Data transmission method, and communication apparatus and system WO2019196801A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810315139.3A CN110365380B (en) 2018-04-10 2018-04-10 Data transmission method, communication device and system
CN201810315139.3 2018-04-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019196801A1 true WO2019196801A1 (en) 2019-10-17

Family

ID=68162805

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/081769 WO2019196801A1 (en) 2018-04-10 2019-04-08 Data transmission method, and communication apparatus and system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN110365380B (en)
WO (1) WO2019196801A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111615207A (en) * 2020-05-11 2020-09-01 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Resource mapping method, device and storage medium
WO2022131975A1 (en) * 2020-12-15 2022-06-23 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Precoded transmission of data

Families Citing this family (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2022188000A1 (en) * 2021-03-08 2022-09-15 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and communication apparatus
CN113726714B (en) * 2021-08-20 2023-12-19 中国空间技术研究院 Constellation diagram optimization-based wireless communication channel interference method
CN114567526B (en) * 2022-02-24 2023-08-08 哲库科技(北京)有限公司 Signal demodulation method, baseband chip, terminal device and storage medium
WO2024031277A1 (en) * 2022-08-08 2024-02-15 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Measurement method and apparatus
CN117676820A (en) * 2022-08-16 2024-03-08 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for determining resource unit
CN115078938B (en) * 2022-08-22 2023-01-03 广东电网有限责任公司佛山供电局 Method and device for identifying insulating property of lightning arrester

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102710390A (en) * 2012-05-03 2012-10-03 新邮通信设备有限公司 Method and device for precoding in multi-user MIMO (multiple input multiple output) system
CN103312432A (en) * 2012-03-06 2013-09-18 华为技术有限公司 Pre-coding method, base station and user equipment
US20140307816A1 (en) * 2013-04-15 2014-10-16 Broadcom Corporation Pilot Design for Massive MIMO Communication
CN107733494A (en) * 2016-08-12 2018-02-23 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of method for precoding, channel condition information determine method and device

Family Cites Families (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US9325538B2 (en) * 2008-07-03 2016-04-26 Apple Inc. Precoding in high-order MIMO
US8982750B2 (en) * 2009-01-16 2015-03-17 Qualcomm Incorporated Method and apparatus for transmitting overload indicator over the air
CN102244563B (en) * 2011-07-08 2013-07-24 电信科学技术研究院 Method, device and system for transmitting and receiving data
WO2013024838A1 (en) * 2011-08-15 2013-02-21 シャープ株式会社 Wireless transmission device, wireless reception device, program, integrated circuit, and wireless communication system
WO2013119152A1 (en) * 2012-02-08 2013-08-15 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Method and arrangement for supporting adjustment of transmission from correlated antennas
CN103731233B (en) * 2012-10-12 2018-07-03 华为技术有限公司 code word feedback method and receiver
CN104113500B (en) * 2013-04-22 2017-09-29 华为技术有限公司 A kind of channel equalization method and recoding processing method, relevant apparatus and system
WO2015030638A1 (en) * 2013-08-27 2015-03-05 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Positioning of wireless devices
CN104702543B (en) * 2013-12-04 2018-05-29 华为技术有限公司 Method for precoding and device
CN104184561B (en) * 2014-01-13 2019-04-30 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Precoded pilot processing method, device, base station and terminal
WO2016095171A1 (en) * 2014-12-18 2016-06-23 华为技术有限公司 Pre-coding method, device and system
CN104852878B (en) * 2015-06-02 2018-09-07 哈尔滨工业大学 Can reduce complexity based on the descending multi-user mimo system method for precoding with mean square error minimum principle
CN107046456B (en) * 2016-02-05 2021-01-26 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Information sending and receiving method and device
KR102235180B1 (en) * 2016-04-25 2021-04-02 엘지전자 주식회사 A method for transmitting and receiving a signal for estimating a phase noise in a wireless communication system, and device supporting the same
US11102789B2 (en) * 2016-08-05 2021-08-24 Apple Inc. Transmission of phase tracking reference signals (PT-RS)
US10367672B2 (en) * 2016-09-28 2019-07-30 Qualcomm Incorporated Enhancements to phase-noise compensation reference signal design and scrambling

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103312432A (en) * 2012-03-06 2013-09-18 华为技术有限公司 Pre-coding method, base station and user equipment
CN102710390A (en) * 2012-05-03 2012-10-03 新邮通信设备有限公司 Method and device for precoding in multi-user MIMO (multiple input multiple output) system
US20140307816A1 (en) * 2013-04-15 2014-10-16 Broadcom Corporation Pilot Design for Massive MIMO Communication
CN107733494A (en) * 2016-08-12 2018-02-23 电信科学技术研究院 A kind of method for precoding, channel condition information determine method and device

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111615207A (en) * 2020-05-11 2020-09-01 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Resource mapping method, device and storage medium
CN111615207B (en) * 2020-05-11 2022-11-08 Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 Resource mapping method, device and storage medium
WO2022131975A1 (en) * 2020-12-15 2022-06-23 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Precoded transmission of data

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN110365380A (en) 2019-10-22
CN110365380B (en) 2021-12-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11082097B2 (en) Method and apparatus for enabling uplink MIMO
WO2019196801A1 (en) Data transmission method, and communication apparatus and system
US9991942B2 (en) Method and apparatus for channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS)
CN108631831B (en) Information transmission method and equipment
CN108292941B (en) Method and apparatus for reduced feedback MIMO
KR102332980B1 (en) Communication method, communication device and system
KR102120959B1 (en) Method for cqi feedback without spatial feedback (pmi/ri) for tdd coordinated multi-point and carrier aggregation scenarios
KR20210052562A (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving uplink control information
US9820290B2 (en) Virtual antenna mapping method and apparatus for feedback of virtual antenna mapping information in MIMO system
US9843409B2 (en) Multiple-input multiple-output method for orthogonal frequency division multiplexing based communication system
WO2019141285A1 (en) Antenna selection indication method, device and system
WO2018202154A1 (en) Method for indicating transmission precoding matrix and device
WO2019127199A1 (en) Method for transmitting uplink data and terminal device
WO2019191932A1 (en) Method and apparatus for selecting uplink antenna
US10917155B2 (en) Mobile station, base station, and communication control method
CN110999120B (en) Method and apparatus for channel quality indicator and channel state information reporting
US20210250206A1 (en) Information Receiving Method and Apparatus and Information Sending Method and Apparatus
KR20180129875A (en) Method and apparatus for enabling uplink MIMO
US20210212071A1 (en) Resource configuration method and communications apparatus
CN111937319B (en) Communication method, communication device and system
CN110324070B (en) Communication method, communication device and system
CN116234030A (en) Communication method, network device and terminal device
CN110557348B (en) Method and communication device for demodulating data
WO2019057094A1 (en) Codebook-based uplink transmission in wireless communications
CN114598365B (en) Transmission method, apparatus, device, and readable storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19784670

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19784670

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1